WO2025169266A1 - Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station - Google Patents
Terminal, wireless communication method, and base stationInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025169266A1 WO2025169266A1 PCT/JP2024/003692 JP2024003692W WO2025169266A1 WO 2025169266 A1 WO2025169266 A1 WO 2025169266A1 JP 2024003692 W JP2024003692 W JP 2024003692W WO 2025169266 A1 WO2025169266 A1 WO 2025169266A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- tci
- tci state
- indicated
- states
- mac
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W16/00—Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
- H04W16/24—Cell structures
- H04W16/28—Cell structures using beam steering
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
- H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
Definitions
- This disclosure relates to terminals, wireless communication methods, and base stations in next-generation mobile communication systems.
- LTE Long Term Evolution
- UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
- 3GPP Rel. 10-14 LTE-Advanced (3GPP Rel. 10-14) was specified with the aim of achieving even greater capacity and sophistication over LTE (Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP (registered trademark)) Release (Rel.) 8 and 9).
- LTE 5th generation mobile communication system
- 5G+ 5th generation mobile communication system
- 6G 6th generation mobile communication system
- NR New Radio
- UEs user terminals
- QCL quasi-co-location
- TCI Transmission Configuration Indication
- Wireless communication systems from Rel. 17 onwards will support a unified TCI state, and wireless communication systems from Rel. 18 onwards are expected to support the indication of a unified TCI state (e.g., multiple TCI states) for multiple transmitting and receiving points.
- a unified TCI state e.g., multiple TCI states
- one of the objectives of this disclosure is to provide a terminal, a wireless communication method, and a base station that appropriately apply the TCI state.
- a terminal has a receiving unit that receives at least one of downlink control information and MAC Control Elements (MAC CEs) that indicate multiple indicated Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) states, and a control unit that controls at least one of downlink reception and uplink transmission based on the multiple indicated TCI states.
- MAC CEs MAC Control Elements
- TCI Transmission Configuration Indication
- control unit controls at least one of downlink reception and uplink transmission based on the multiple indicated TCI states.
- the control unit receives information indicating a subset of the multiple indicated TCI states
- the control unit updates the indicated TCI states of some of the multiple indicated TCI states based on the information indicating the subset, and maintains the remaining indicated TCI states.
- TCI conditions can be applied appropriately.
- FIG. 1A and 1B show an example of a unified/common TCI framework.
- 2A and 2B show an example of DCI-based TCI status indication.
- 3A to 3D are diagrams showing an example of a multi-TRP.
- 4A-4C are diagrams illustrating an example of application of an indicated TCI state.
- FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of mapping between TCI code points and multiple joint TCI states when multiple indicated TCI states (joint) are indicated.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of update control of the indicated TCI state according to the first embodiment.
- FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of update control of the indicated TCI state according to the second embodiment.
- Figure 8 shows an example of a MAC CE for activation/deactivation of the unified TCI state.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment.
- FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a base station according to an embodiment.
- FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to an embodiment.
- FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to an embodiment.
- FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a vehicle according to an embodiment.
- TCI transmission configuration indication state
- TCI states may refer to those that apply to downlink signals/channels.
- the equivalent of TCI states that apply to uplink signals/channels may be expressed as spatial relations.
- TCI status is information about the quasi-co-location (QCL) of signals/channels, and may also be called spatial reception parameters, spatial relation information, etc.
- the TCI status may be set in the UE for each channel or signal.
- QCL is an index that indicates the statistical properties of a signal/channel. For example, if a signal/channel has a QCL relationship with another signal/channel, it may mean that it can be assumed that at least one of the Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, and spatial parameters (e.g., spatial Rx parameters) is the same between these different signals/channels (i.e., they have QCL with respect to at least one of these).
- the spatial reception parameters may correspond to the reception beam of the UE (e.g., a reception analog beam), and the beam may be identified based on the spatial QCL.
- the QCL (or at least one element of the QCL) may be interpreted as sQCL (spatial QCL).
- QCL types QCL types
- four QCL types A-D may be provided, each with different parameters (or parameter sets) that can be assumed to be identical.
- the UE's assumption that a Control Resource Set (CORESET), channel, or reference signal has a specific QCL (e.g., QCL type D) relationship with another CORESET, channel, or reference signal may be referred to as a QCL assumption.
- CORESET Control Resource Set
- QCL QCL type D
- the UE may determine at least one of the transmit beam (Tx beam) and receive beam (Rx beam) for a signal/channel based on the TCI condition or QCL assumption of the signal/channel.
- the TCI state may be, for example, information regarding the QCL between the target channel (in other words, the reference signal (RS) for that channel) and another signal (e.g., another RS).
- the TCI state may be set (indicated) by higher layer signaling, physical layer signaling, or a combination of these.
- the physical layer signaling may be, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI).
- DCI Downlink Control Information
- the channel for which the TCI state or spatial relationship is set (specified) may be, for example, at least one of the following: a downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)), a downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)), an uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)), and an uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)).
- PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel
- PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
- PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
- PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
- the RS that has a QCL relationship with the channel may be, for example, at least one of a synchronization signal block (SSB), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a sounding reference signal (SRS), a tracking CSI-RS (also called a tracking reference signal (TRS)), and a QCL detection reference signal (also called a QRS).
- SSB synchronization signal block
- CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
- SRS sounding reference signal
- TRS tracking CSI-RS
- QRS QCL detection reference signal
- An SSB is a signal block that includes at least one of a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS), a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS), and a Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH).
- PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
- SSS Secondary Synchronization Signal
- PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
- An SSB may also be referred to as an SS/PBCH block.
- An RS of QCL type X in a TCI state may refer to an RS that has a QCL type X relationship with a certain channel/signal (DMRS), and this RS may be called a QCL source of QCL type X in that TCI state.
- DMRS channel/signal
- a UE can configure a list of up to M TCI-State settings in the higher layer parameter PDSCH-Config for decoding of PDSCH according to a detected PDCCH with DCI intended for the UE and a given serving cell, where M depends on the UE capability maxNumberConfiguredTCIstatesPerCC.
- Each TCI-State includes parameters for setting the QCL relationship between one or two downlink reference signals and the DMRS port of the PDSCH, the DMRS port of the PDCCH, or the CSI-RS port of the CSI-RS resource.
- the QCL relationship is set by the upper layer parameter qcl-Type1 for the first DL RS and the upper layer parameter qcl-Type2 for the second DL RS (if configured).
- the QCL type corresponding to each DL RS is given by the upper layer parameter qcl-Type in QCL-Info and takes one of the following values: - 'typeA': ⁇ Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread ⁇ - 'typeB': ⁇ Doppler shift, Doppler spread ⁇ - 'typeC': ⁇ Doppler shift, average delay ⁇ - 'typeD': ⁇ Spatial Rx parameter ⁇
- a TCI-State associates one or two DL Reference Signals (RS) with a corresponding QCL type. If an additional physical cell identifier (PCI) is configured for that RS, it is set to the same value for both DL RSs.
- PCI physical cell identifier
- the unified TCI framework allows multiple types of channels/RSs (UL/DL) to be controlled by a common framework.
- the unified TCI framework does not specify TCI states or spatial relationships for each channel as in Rel. 15, but instead specifies a common beam (common TCI state) and applies it to all UL and DL channels, or applies a common beam for UL to all UL channels and a common beam for DL to all DL channels.
- One common beam for both DL and UL, or one common beam for DL and one common beam for UL (two common beams in total) are being considered.
- the UE may assume the same TCI state for UL and DL (joint TCI state, joint TCI pool, joint common TCI pool, joint TCI state set).
- the UE may assume different TCI states for UL and DL (separate TCI state, separate TCI pool, UL separate TCI pool and DL separate TCI pool, separate common TCI pool, UL common TCI pool and DL common TCI pool).
- the UL and DL default beams may be aligned using MAC CE-based beam management (MAC CE level beam instructions).
- the PDSCH default TCI state may be updated to match the default UL beam (spatial relationship).
- DCI-based beam management may indicate a common beam/unified TCI state from the same TCI pool (joint common TCI pool, joint TCI pool, set) for both UL and DL.
- X (>1) TCI states may be activated by the MAC CE.
- the UL/DL DCI may select one from the X active TCI states.
- the selected TCI state may apply to both UL and DL channels/RS.
- the TCI pool (set) may be multiple TCI states configured by RRC parameters, or multiple TCI states (active TCI states, active TCI pool, set) activated by the MAC CE among multiple TCI states configured by RRC parameters.
- Each TCI state may be a QCL type A/D RS.
- SSB, CSI-RS, or SRS may be configured as the QCL type A/D RS.
- the number of TCI states corresponding to each of one or more TRPs may be specified.
- the number N ( ⁇ 1) of TCI states (UL TCI states) applied to UL channels/RS and the number M ( ⁇ 1) of TCI states (DL TCI states) applied to DL channels/RS may be specified.
- At least one of N and M may be notified/configured/instructed to the UE via higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling.
- this may mean that one UL TCI state and one DL TCI state for a single TRP are separately notified/configured/instructed to the UE (separate TCI states for a single TRP).
- this may mean that the UE is notified/configured/instructed to a TCI state common to multiple (two) ULs and DLs for multiple (two) TRPs (joint TCI state for multiple TRPs).
- N and M were described as 1 or 2, but the values of N and M may be 3 or greater, and N and M may be different.
- RRC parameters configure multiple TCI states for both DL and UL.
- the MAC CE may activate multiple TCI states from the configured multiple TCI states.
- the DCI may indicate one of the activated multiple TCI states.
- the DCI may be a UL/DL DCI.
- the indicated TCI state may apply to at least one (or all) of the UL/DL channels/RS.
- One DCI may indicate both UL TCI and DL TCI.
- a single point may represent one TCI state that applies to both UL and DL, or two TCI states that apply to UL and DL, respectively.
- At least one of the multiple TCI states configured by the RRC parameters and the multiple TCI states activated by the MAC CE may be referred to as a TCI pool (common TCI pool, joint TCI pool, TCI state pool).
- the multiple TCI states activated by the MAC CE may be referred to as an active TCI pool (active common TCI pool).
- RRC parameters higher layer parameters that set multiple TCI states
- configuration information that sets multiple TCI states
- configuration information that sets multiple TCI states
- DCI may mean receiving instruction information that indicates one of the multiple TCI states included in the DCI, or simply receiving "instruction information.”
- the RRC parameters configure multiple TCI states (joint common TCI pools) for both DL and UL.
- the MAC CE may activate multiple TCI states (active TCI pools) from the configured multiple TCI states. Separate active TCI pools may be configured/activated for each of the UL and DL.
- the DL DCI or a new DCI format may select (indicate) one or more (e.g., one) TCI states.
- the selected TCI state may apply to one or more (or all) DL channels/RSs.
- the DL channels may be PDCCH/PDSCH/CSI-RS.
- the UE may determine the TCI state for each DL channel/RS using the TCI state behavior (TCI framework) of Rel. 16.
- the UL DCI or a new DCI format may select (indicate) one or more (e.g., one) TCI states.
- the selected TCI state may apply to one or more (or all) UL channels/RSs.
- the UL channels may be PUSCH/SRS/PUCCH. In this way, different DCIs may indicate UL TCI and DL DCI separately.
- MAC CE/DCI will support beam activation/indication to a TCI state associated with a different physical cell identifier (PCI). Also, in Rel. 18 NR and later, it is assumed that MAC CE/DCI will support indicative serving cell change to a cell with a different PCI.
- PCI physical cell identifier
- the UE can configure a list of up to 128 DLorJointTCIState settings within PDSCH-Config.
- the UE can apply the DLorJointTCIState or UL-TCIState configuration from the reference BWP of the reference CC. If the UE has DLorJointTCIState or UL-TCIState configured in any CC in the same band, it is not assumed that TCI-State, SpatialRelationInfo (spatial relation information), or PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo (PUCCH spatial relation information) in that band are configured, except for SpatialRelationInfoPos (spatial relation information for position).
- the UE assumes that if the UE has TCI-State set in any CC in the CC list by simultaneousTCI-UpdateList1-r16 (simultaneous TCI update list 1), simultaneousTCI-UpdateList2-r16 (simultaneous TCI update list 2), simultaneousSpatial-UpdatedList1-r16 (simultaneous spatial update list 1), or simultaneousSpatial-UpdatedList2-r16 (simultaneous spatial update list 2), the UE does not have DLorJointTCIState or UL-TCIState set in any CC in that CC.
- the UE receives an activation command used to map up to eight TCI states and/or TCI state pairs, with one TCI state for the DL channel/signal and one TCI state for the UL channel/signal, to code points in the DCI field 'Transmission Configuration Indication' (TCI) for one CC/DL BWP or set of CCs/DL BWPs, if available.
- TCI Transmission Configuration Indication
- TCI state IDs When a set of TCI state IDs is activated for a set of CCs/DL BWPs, and, if available, for one of the CCs/DL BWPs, the same set of TCI state IDs applies to all DL and/or UL BWPs within the indicated CC, where the applicable list of CCs is determined by the CC indicated in the activation command.
- the UE applies the indicated DLorJointTCIState and/or UL-TCIState to one or a set of CC/DL BWPs, and if the indicated mapping to one single TCI codepoint applies, the UE applies the indicated DLorJointTCIState and/or UL-TCIState to one or a set of CC/DL BWPs.
- the UE assumes that the QCL type A/D source RS is set in the CC/DL BWP to which the TCI state applies.
- Unified TCI Framework supports the following modes 1 to 3: [Mode 1] MAC CE based TCI state indication [Mode 2] DCI based TCI state indication by DCI format 1_1/1_2 with DL assignment [Mode 3] DCI based TCI state indication by DCI format 1_1/1_2 without DL assignment
- 17 TCI State ID receives DCI format 1_1/1_2 providing an indicated TCI state with the Rel. 17 TCI State ID for one CC, or receives DCI format 1_1/1_2 providing an indicated TCI state with the Rel. 17 TCI State ID for all CCs in the same CC list as the CC list configured by simultaneous TCI update list 1 or simultaneous TCI update list 2 (e.g., simultaneousTCI-UpdateList1 or simultaneousTCI-UpdateList2).
- DCI format 1_1/1_2 may or may not be accompanied by a DL assignment if one is available.
- DCI format 1_1/1_2 does not carry a DL assignment
- the UE can assume (verify) the following for that DCI: -
- the CS-RNTI is used to scramble the CRC for the DCI.
- the values of the following DCI fields are set as follows: -
- the redundancy version (RV) field is all '1's.
- the modulation and coding scheme (MCS) field is all '1's.
- NDI new data indicator
- the frequency domain resource assignment (FDRA) field is all '0's for FDRA type 0 or all '1's for FDRA type 1 or all '0's for Dynamic Switch (similar to PDCCH validation for release of DL semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) or UL grant type 2 scheduling).
- DCI in Mode 2/Mode 3 above may also be referred to as beam instruction DCI.
- Rel. 15/16 if the UE does not support active BWP changes via DCI, the UE ignores the BWP indicator field. Similar behavior is being considered for the relationship between Rel. 17 TCI state support and TCI field interpretation. If the UE is configured with Rel. 17 TCI state, the TCI field will always be present in DCI format 1_1/1_2; if the UE does not support TCI updates via DCI, the UE will ignore the TCI field.
- the presence or absence of a TCI field (TCI presence information in DCI, tci-PresentInDCI) is configured for each CORESET.
- the TCI field in DCI format 1_1 is 0-bit if the higher layer parameter tci-PresentInDCI is not enabled, and 3-bit otherwise. If the BWP indicator field indicates a BWP other than the active BWP, the UE shall follow the following actions: [Operation] If the higher layer parameter tci-PresentInDCI is not enabled for the CORESET used for the PDCCH carrying that DCI format 1_1, the UE shall assume that tci-PresentInDCI is not enabled for all CORESETs within the indicated BWP; otherwise, the UE shall assume that tci-PresentInDCI is enabled for all CORESETs within the indicated BWP.
- the TCI field in DCI format 1_2 is 0 bit if the higher layer parameter tci-PresentInDCI-1-2 is not set, otherwise it is 1, 2 or 3 bits determined by the higher layer parameter tci-PresentInDCI-1-2. If the BWP indicator field indicates a BWP other than the active BWP, the UE shall follow the following actions.
- the UE shall assume that tci-PresentInDCI is not enabled for all CORESETs in the indicated BWP; otherwise, the UE shall assume that tci-PresentInDCI-1-2 for all CORESETs in the indicated BWP is set with the same value as tci-PresentInDCI-1-2 set for the CORESET used for the PDCCH carrying that DCI format 1_2.
- Figure 2A shows an example of a DCI-based joint DL/UL TCI status indication.
- a TCI status ID indicating the joint DL/UL TCI status is associated with the value of the TCI field for the joint DL/UL TCI status indication.
- FIG. 2B shows an example of a DCI-based separate DL/UL TCI status indication.
- At least one TCI status ID is associated with the value of the TCI field for the separate DL/UL TCI status indication: a TCI status ID indicating a DL-only TCI status and a TCI status ID indicating a UL-only TCI status.
- TCI field values 000 to 001 are associated with only one TCI status ID for DL
- TCI field values 010 to 011 are associated with only one TCI status ID for UL
- TCI field values 100 to 111 are associated with both one TCI status ID for DL and one TCI status ID for UL.
- the unified/common TCI state may refer to the Rel. 17 TCI state indicated using (Rel. 17) DCI/MAC CE/RRC (indicated Rel. 17 TCI state).
- TCI state indicates whether or not TCI is mapped to multiple types of signals (channels/RS).
- unified/common TCI state TCI state applicable to multiple types of signals (channels/RS)
- TCI state for multiple types of signals channels/RS
- the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state may be shared with at least one of the UE-specific reception of PDSCH/PDCC (updated using Rel. 17 DCI/MAC CE/RRC), PUSCH of dynamic grant (DCI)/configured grant, and multiple (e.g., all) dedicated PUCCH resources.
- the TCI state indicated by DCI/MAC CE/RRC may be referred to as the indicated TCI state or the unified TCI state.
- a TCI state other than the unified TCI state may refer to a Rel. 17 TCI state configured using (Rel. 17) MAC CE/RRC (configured Rel. 17 TCI state).
- the terms configured Rel. 17 TCI state, configured TCI state, a TCI state other than the unified TCI state, and a TCI state applied to a specific type of signal (channel/RS) may be interpreted interchangeably.
- the configured Rel. 17 TCI state may not be shared with at least one of the UE-specific reception on the PDSCH/PDCC (updated using Rel. 17 DCI/MAC CE/RRC), the PUSCH of the dynamic grant (DCI)/configured grant, and multiple (e.g., all) dedicated PUCCH resources.
- the configured Rel. 17 TCI state may be configured by RRC/MAC CE per CORESET/per resource/per resource set, and may not be updated even if the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state (common TCI state) is updated.
- the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state will be applied to UE-specific channels/signals (RS). It is also being considered that the UE will be notified using higher layer signaling (RRC signaling) as to whether the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state or the configured Rel. 17 TCI state will be applied to non-UE-specific channels/signals.
- RS UE-specific channels/signals
- RRC signaling higher layer signaling
- the RRC parameters for the configured Rel. 17 TCI state (TCI state ID) will have the same configuration as the RRC parameters for the TCI state in Rel. 15/16. It is being considered that the configured Rel. 17 TCI state will be configured/instructed per CORESET/per resource/per resource set using RRC/MAC CE. It is also being considered that the UE will make decisions regarding this configuration/instruction based on specific parameters.
- the UE will update the indicated TCI state and the configured TCI state separately. For example, if the unified TCI state for the indicated TCI state is updated for the UE, the configured TCI state may not need to be updated. It is also being considered that the UE will make a decision about this update based on specific parameters.
- RRC/MAC CE higher layer signaling
- TCI state indication In addition, with regard to intra-cell beam indication (TCI state indication), it is being considered to support Rel. 17 TCI state indication for UE-specific CORESETs and the PDSCHs associated with those CORESETs, as well as non-UE-specific CORESETs and the PDSCHs associated with those CORESETs.
- inter-cell beam indication e.g., L1/L2 inter-cell mobility
- support for indicating Rel. 17 TCI states for UE-specific CORESETs and the PDSCHs associated with those CORESETs is under consideration.
- whether or not to apply the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state associated with the serving cell for the Rel. 17 TCI state indication in CORESET #0 is configured by RRC for each CORESET. If not, the legacy MAC CE/RACH signaling mechanism may be used.
- the CSI-RS associated with the Rel. 17 TCI state applied to CORESET #0 may be QCL'd with the SSB associated with the serving cell PCI (physical cell ID) (similar to Rel. 15).
- a CORESET with a common search space (CSS), and a CORESET with a CSS and a UE-specific search space (USS), whether to follow the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state may be configured for each CORESET by an RRC parameter. If the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state is not configured for that CORESET, the configured Rel. 17 TCI state may apply to that CORESET.
- CCS common search space
- USS UE-specific search space
- whether to follow the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state may be configured by an RRC parameter for each channel/resource/resource set. If the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state is not configured for that channel/resource/resource set, the configured Rel. 17 TCI state may apply to that channel/resource/resource set.
- the indicated TCI state by the MAC CE/DCI may apply to the following channels/RS:
- CORESET0 follows the TCI state activated by the MAC CE or is QCL'd with SSB.
- the indicated TCI state For CORESETs with index other than 0 with USS/CSS type 3, the indicated TCI state always applies.
- the indicated TCI state applies. Otherwise, the configured TCI state for that CORESET applies to that CORESET.
- [PDSCH] The indication TCI state always applies for all UE-dedicated PDSCHs.
- a non-UE-dedicated PDSCH a PDSCH scheduled by a DCI in the CSS
- followUnifiedTCIState for the CORESET of the PDCCH that schedules that PDSCH
- the indicated TCI state may apply. Otherwise, the configured TCI state for that PDSCH applies to that PDSCH.
- followUnifiedTCIState is not set for a PDSCH, whether a non-UE-dedicated PDSCH follows the indicated TCI state may depend on whether followUnifiedTCIState is set for the CORESET used to schedule that PDSCH.
- CSI-RS For an A-CSI-RS for CSI acquisition or beam management, if followUnifiedTCIState is set (for CORESET of the PDCCH that triggers that A-CSI-RS), the indicated TCI state applies. For other CSI-RSs, the configured TCI state for that CSI-RS applies.
- Multi-TRP In NR, one or more transmission/reception points (Transmission/Reception Points (TRPs)) (multi-TRPs) are considered to perform DL transmission to a UE using one or more panels (multi-panels). Also, it is considered that a UE performs UL transmission to one or more TRPs.
- TRPs Transmission/Reception Points
- multiple TRPs may correspond to the same cell identifier (ID), or to different cell IDs.
- the cell ID may be a physical cell ID (e.g., PCI) or a virtual cell ID.
- FIGS 3A-3D show examples of multi-TRP scenarios. In these examples, it is assumed that each TRP can transmit four different beams, but this is not limited to this example.
- FIG. 3A shows an example of a case where only one TRP (TRP1 in this example) of multiple TRPs transmits to the UE (this may be referred to as single mode, single TRP, etc.).
- TRP1 transmits both control signals (PDCCH) and data signals (PDSCH) to the UE.
- PDCCH control signals
- PDSCH data signals
- single-TRP mode may refer to the mode when multi-TRP (mode) is not set.
- FIG. 3B shows an example of a case where only one TRP (TRP1 in this example) of the multi-TRPs transmits a control signal to the UE, and the multi-TRP transmits a data signal (this may be called single master mode).
- the UE receives each PDSCH transmitted from the multi-TRP based on a single piece of downlink control information (Downlink Control Information (DCI)).
- DCI Downlink Control Information
- FIG. 3C shows an example of a case where each of the multi-TRPs transmits a part of the control signal to the UE, and the multi-TRP transmits a data signal (this may be called master-slave mode).
- Part 1 of the control signal (DCI) may be transmitted on TRP1
- part 2 of the control signal (DCI) may be transmitted on TRP2.
- Part 2 of the control signal may depend on part 1.
- the UE receives each PDSCH transmitted from the multi-TRP based on these parts of the DCI.
- FIG. 3D shows an example of a case where each of the multi-TRPs transmits a separate control signal to the UE, and the multi-TRPs transmit data signals (this may be called multi-master mode).
- a first control signal (DCI) may be transmitted from TRP1
- a second control signal (DCI) may be transmitted from TRP2.
- the UE receives each PDSCH transmitted from the multi-TRP based on these DCIs.
- the DCI may be called a single DCI (S-DCI, single PDCCH).
- S-DCI single DCI
- M-DCI multiple DCIs
- Each TRP in a multi-TRP may transmit a different transport block (TB)/code word (CW)/layer.
- TB transport block
- CW code word
- each TRP in a multi-TRP may transmit the same TB/CW/layer.
- Non-Coherent Joint Transmission is being considered as one form of multi-TRP transmission.
- TRP1 modulates and layer maps a first codeword to transmit a first PDSCH using a first number of layers (e.g., two layers) with a first precoding.
- TRP2 modulates and layer maps a second codeword to transmit a second PDSCH using a second number of layers (e.g., two layers) with a second precoding.
- multiple PDSCHs may be defined as partially or completely overlapping in at least one of the time and frequency domains.
- the first PDSCH from the first TRP and the second PDSCH from the second TRP may overlap in at least one of the time and frequency resources.
- the first PDSCH and second PDSCH may be assumed to be not quasi-co-located (QCL). Reception of multiple PDSCHs may be interpreted as simultaneous reception of PDSCHs that are not of a certain QCL type (e.g., QCL type D).
- QCL type D e.g., QCL type D
- PDSCH transport block (TB) or codeword (CW) repetition across multi-TRP will be supported. It is considered that repetition schemes (URLLC schemes, for example, schemes 1, 2a, 2b, 3, and 4) across multi-TRP in the frequency domain, layer (spatial) domain, or time domain will be supported.
- multi-PDSCH from multi-TRP is space division multiplexed (SDM).
- SDM space division multiplexed
- FDM frequency division multiplexed
- RV redundancy version
- the RV may be the same or different for multi-TRP.
- multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs are time division multiplexed (TDM).
- TDM time division multiplexed
- multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs are transmitted within one slot.
- multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs are transmitted within different slots.
- Such a multi-TRP scenario allows for more flexible transmission control using high-quality channels.
- NCJT using multiple TRPs/panels may use a high rank.
- both single DCI single PDCCH, e.g., Figure 3B
- multiple DCI multiple PDCCH, e.g., Figure 3D
- the maximum number of TRPs may be 2.
- TCI extensions are being considered.
- Each TCI code point in the DCI may correspond to one or two TCI states.
- the TCI field size may be the same as that in Rel. 15.
- one TCI state without CORESETPoolIndex (also referred to as TRP Info) is set to one CORESET.
- a CORESET pool index is configured for each CORESET.
- a specific field may be included in a DCI format (eg, DCI format 1_1/1-2 (which may be referred to as DL DCI)) for scheduling/activating/triggering DL channels/signals.
- DCI format 1_1/1-2 which may be referred to as DL DCI
- the specific field may be a field that indicates that one or more (e.g., both/two) indicated TCI states (joint/DL TCI states) should be applied to the DL channel/signal being scheduled/activated/triggered.
- the specific field may be a field that indicates the number/order of the indicated TCI states to be applied.
- the particular field may be represented by a particular number of bits (e.g., 2 bits).
- this particular field may be referred to as a TCI selection field, but the name is not limited to this.
- the offset (hereinafter, this may be referred to as a scheduling offset, a triggering offset, etc.) between the reception of the DL DCI and the reception of the corresponding DL channel/signal may be smaller than a certain threshold.
- the UE may buffer the received signal using the indicated TCI state (joint/DL TCI state).
- a DL channel/signal is scheduled/triggered by a first DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_0)
- a single frequency network (SFN) scheme e.g., SFN scheme for PDSCH (RRC parameter sfnSchemePdsch)
- multiple (e.g., both/two) indicated TCI states may be applied to the DL channel/signal.
- one (e.g., first) indicated TCI state may be applied to the DL channel/signal.
- a DL channel/signal is scheduled by a second DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_1/1_2) that does not include a specific field
- a second DCI format e.g., DCI format 1_1/1_2
- multiple (e.g., both/two) indicated TCI states may be applied to the DL channel/signal.
- FIGS 4A-4C show other examples of application of indicated TCI states.
- two indicated TCI states (TCI state #1 as the first TCI state and TCI state #2 as the second TCI state) are indicated to the UE.
- the DL DCI includes a field (TCI selection field) that indicates the number/order of the indicated TCI states to be applied.
- a code point of "00" in this field indicates that the first indicated TCI state is to be applied.
- a code point of "01” in this field indicates that the second indicated TCI state is to be applied.
- a code point of "10” in this field indicates that both the first indicated TCI state and the second indicated TCI state are to be applied.
- a code point of "11" in this field is unused.
- FIG 4C shows an example in which PDSCH is scheduled by DL DCI.
- the DCI includes a TCI selection field indicating codepoint "00". Therefore, the UE applies TCI state #1 to receive PDSCH (see Figure 4C).
- a certain DCI field (e.g., a TCI selection field) may indicate the channel/signal to which the indicated TCI state is to be applied.
- the operation in this case may be at least one of operation 1 and operation 2 below.
- the specific threshold may be, for example, at least one of an existing threshold (defined up to Rel. 15/16) and a value based on RRC parameters/UE capability information defined in Rel. 17/18 or later.
- the existing threshold may be, for example, a value based on UE capability information specified in Rel. 15 in the second frequency range (e.g., FR2).
- the particular DCI field may always be included in the DCI.
- Certain fields may be included in the DL DCI if certain RRC parameters are configured.
- the UE may apply a specific indication TCI state (e.g., a first indication (joint/DL) TCI state) to multiple (e.g., all) DL channels/signals (e.g., PDSCH DMRS ports of multiple (all) PDSCH transmission opportunities) scheduled/triggered by the DCI.
- a specific indication TCI state e.g., a first indication (joint/DL) TCI state
- multiple e.g., all) DL channels/signals e.g., PDSCH DMRS ports of multiple (all) PDSCH transmission opportunities
- the UE may apply a specific indication TCI state (e.g., a second indication (joint/DL) TCI state) to multiple (e.g., all) DL channels/signals (e.g., PDSCH DMRS ports of multiple (all) PDSCH transmission opportunities) scheduled/triggered by the DCI.
- a specific indication TCI state e.g., a second indication (joint/DL) TCI state
- multiple e.g., all) DL channels/signals e.g., PDSCH DMRS ports of multiple (all) PDSCH transmission opportunities
- the UE may apply multiple indication TCI states (e.g., both the first indication (joint/DL) TCI state and the second indication (joint/DL) TCI state) to reception of the DL channel/signal scheduled/triggered by the DCI.
- multiple indication TCI states e.g., both the first indication (joint/DL) TCI state and the second indication (joint/DL) TCI state
- multiple indication TCI states may be applied in a first order (e.g., the first indication TCI state, then the second indication TCI state).
- Operation 1 above may be applied under certain conditions.
- the certain conditions may be applied, for example, if (if applicable) the offset between at least the reception of the scheduling/triggering DL DCI and the reception of the scheduled/triggered DL channel/signal is equal to or greater than a certain threshold.
- a DL channel/signal may be scheduled/triggered by a DL DCI that does not include a specific field (e.g., a TCI selection field).
- the UE may apply one or more specific indication TCI states to the DL channel/signal.
- the UE may be configured to apply one or more indicated TCI states using higher layer signaling (RRC/MAC CE) (options 0-1).
- RRC/MAC CE higher layer signaling
- the UE may be configured using specific RRC parameters to apply either a first indicated TCI state, a second indicated TCI state, or both to reception of DL channels/signals.
- the UE may also decide to apply the first (or second) indicated TCI state to receiving the DL channel/signal (options 0-2).
- the UE may also determine that multiple indicated TCI states (e.g., both the first indicated TCI state and the second indicated TCI state) apply to receiving the DL channel/signal (options 0-3).
- multiple indicated TCI states e.g., both the first indicated TCI state and the second indicated TCI state
- the UE may also determine to apply to the DL channel/signal the same indicated TCI state as the indicated TCI state of the PDCCH corresponding to the DL DCI that scheduled the DL channel/signal (options 0-4).
- the UE may also apply the indicated TCI state for one or more TRPs. This may be determined using the existing TCI field (options 0-5).
- Operation 2 above may be applied under certain conditions.
- the certain conditions may be applied, for example, when (if applicable) the offset between at least the reception of the scheduling/triggering DL DCI and the reception of the scheduled/triggered DL channel/signal is greater than or equal to a certain threshold (e.g., "timeDurationForQCL").
- a certain threshold e.g., "timeDurationForQCL”
- the TCI state activation command (MAC CE) is expected to indicate whether each joint/separate (DL/UL) TCI state mapped to a TCI codepoint is the first or second joint/separate (DL/UL) TCI state (see Figure 5).
- Figure 5 shows an example of TCI states mapped to TCI code points when the same (or common) indicated TCI state applies/supports for DL and UL (joint).
- one DCI or MAC CE
- the number of indicated TCI states may be determined based on the DCI (e.g., TCI state selection field)/RRC.
- a first indicated TCI state e.g., a unified TCI state corresponding to a first TRP
- a second indicated TCI state e.g., a unified TCI state corresponding to a second TRP
- the indication/application of multiple indicated TCI states corresponding to multiple (e.g., two) TRPs is supported, it is expected that the indicated TCI state applied to each TRP will be updated (or newly indicated) depending on the communication situation/communication environment.
- the TCI state to be applied by the UE is not sufficiently considered, the TCI state may not be applied appropriately, which could result in deterioration of communication quality, reduced throughput, etc.
- the inventors therefore focused on these issues, studied operation in unified TCI states, and came up with one aspect of this embodiment.
- a word enclosed in "( )" in a sentence may indicate an explanation of the word immediately preceding it (for example, an explanation of spelling), a paraphrase, a specific example, a supplementary explanation, etc.
- a word enclosed in "[ ]" in a sentence may be interpreted including the word in the meaning of the entire sentence, or may be interpreted excluding the word in the meaning of the entire sentence (ignoring the word in the meaning of the entire sentence). Note that "( )" and "[ ]” may also be used for purposes/meanings other than those mentioned above.
- A/B and “at least one of A and B” may be interpreted interchangeably. Also, in this disclosure, “A/B/C” may mean “at least one of A, B, and C.”
- Radio Resource Control RRC
- RRC parameters RRC parameters
- RRC messages upper layer parameters, fields, information elements (IEs), settings, etc.
- IEs information elements
- CEs Medium Access Control control elements
- update commands activation/deactivation commands, etc.
- higher layer signaling may be, for example, Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling, broadcast information, other messages (e.g., messages from the core network such as positioning protocol (e.g., NR Positioning Protocol A (NRPPa)/LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP)) messages), or a combination of these.
- RRC Radio Resource Control
- MAC Medium Access Control
- LPP LTE Positioning Protocol
- MAC signaling may use, for example, a MAC Control Element (MAC CE), a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU), etc.
- Broadcast information may be, for example, a Master Information Block (MIB), a System Information Block (SIB), Remaining Minimum System Information (RMSI), Other System Information (OSI), etc.
- MIB Master Information Block
- SIB System Information Block
- RMSI Remaining Minimum System Information
- OSI Other System Information
- physical layer signaling may be, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI), etc.
- DCI Downlink Control Information
- UCI Uplink Control Information
- multi-TRP multi-TRP system
- multi-TRP transmission multi-PDSCH
- multi-PDSCH multi-PDSCH
- the terms single DCI, single PDCCH, multiple TRPs based on a single DCI, activating two TCI states on at least one TCI code point, mapping at least one code point in the TCI field to two TCI states, and setting a specific index (e.g., a TRP index, a CORESET pool index, or an index corresponding to a TRP) for a specific channel/CORESET may be interpreted interchangeably.
- the following may be interpreted interchangeably: single TRP, channel/signal using a single TRP, channel using one TCI state/spatial relationship, multi-TRP not being enabled by RRC/DCI, multiple TCI states/spatial relationships not being enabled by RRC/DCI, a CORESETPoolIndex value of 1 not being set for any CORESET, and no codepoint in the TCI field being mapped to two TCI states.
- TRP#2 (second TRP)
- single DCI sDCI
- single PDCCH multi-TRP system based on single DCI
- sDCI-based MTRP multi-TRP system based on single DCI
- activation of two TCI states on at least one TCI codepoint may be read interchangeably.
- beam instruction DCI, beam instruction MAC CE, and beam instruction DCI/MAC CE may be interpreted interchangeably.
- an instruction regarding the instruction TCI status to a UE may be given using at least one of a DCI and a MAC CE.
- channel, signal, and channel/signal may be interchangeable.
- DL channel, DL signal, DL signal/channel, transmission/reception of DL signal/channel, DL reception, and DL transmission may be interchangeable.
- UL channel, UL signal, UL signal/channel, transmission/reception of UL signal/channel, UL reception, and UL transmission may be interchangeable.
- applying TCI state/QCL assumptions to each channel/signal/resource may mean applying TCI state/QCL assumptions to transmission and reception of each channel/signal/resource.
- the first TRP may correspond to the first TCI state (the first TCI state indicated).
- the second TRP may correspond to the second TCI state (the second TCI state indicated).
- the nth TRP may correspond to the nth TCI state (the nth TCI state indicated).
- the first CORESET pool index value (e.g., 0), the first TRP index value (e.g., 1), and the first TCI state (first DL/UL (joint/separate) TCI state) may correspond to each other.
- the second CORESET pool index value (e.g., 1), the second TRP index value (e.g., 2), and the second TCI state (second DL/UL (joint/separate) TCI state) may correspond to each other.
- the application of multiple TCI states in transmission and reception using multiple TRPs will be mainly described in terms of a method targeting two TRPs (i.e., when at least one of N and M is 2), but the number of TRPs may be three or more (multiple), and each embodiment may be applied to correspond to the number of TRPs. In other words, at least one of N and M may be a number greater than 2.
- Each embodiment of the present disclosure may be applied regardless of the setting of specific upper layer parameters, or may be applied when one or more specific upper layer parameters are set.
- the specific upper layer parameter may be, for example, at least one of a parameter indicating whether a TCI selection field is present in the DL DCI (e.g., tciSelection-PresentInDCI), a parameter indicating the application of a unified TCI state (e.g., followUnifiedTCI-State), a parameter indicating the application of an indicated TCI state (e.g., applyIndicatedTCIState), and a parameter indicating whether a TCI field is present in the DL DCI (e.g., tciPresentInDCI).
- a parameter indicating whether a TCI selection field is present in the DL DCI e.g., tciSelection-PresentInDCI
- a parameter indicating the application of a unified TCI state e.g., followUnifiedTCI-State
- a parameter indicating the application of an indicated TCI state e.g., applyIndicatedTCIState
- Each of the following embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to the reception of any DL channel/signal (e.g., PDSCH/PDCCH/A-CSI-RS).
- Each of the following embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to the transmission of any UL channel/signal (e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH).
- the first embodiment may be suitably applied to a single DCI-based multi-TRP.
- this is not limited to this, and it may also be applied to a multi-DCI-based multi-TRP or a single TRP.
- One or more (e.g., two) unified TCI states may be indicated by a code point (e.g., TCI code point) in a predetermined field (e.g., TCI state field) used to indicate the TCI state included in a predetermined DCI format.
- the unified TCI state may mean at least one of the joint TCI state, DL TCI state, and UL TCI state.
- the unified TCI state indicated by the DCI may be read as the indicated TCI state.
- the predetermined DCI format may be a DCI format used for PDSCH scheduling (e.g., DCI format 1_1/1_2), or may be another DCI format.
- one or more (e.g., two) indicated TCI states may be indicated to the UE by the codepoint in the TCI status field of one DCI.
- the DCI may indicate ⁇ first joint TCI state, second joint TCI state ⁇ to the UE.
- the first joint TCI state may apply to the first TRP, and the second joint TCI state may apply to the second TRP.
- the DCI may indicate ⁇ first DL TCI state, first UL TCI state, second DL TCI state, second UL TCI state ⁇ to the UE.
- the first DL TCI state and first UL TCI state may apply to the first TRP, and the second DL TCI state and second UL TCI state may apply to the second TRP.
- some of the indicated TCI states may be indicated to the UE.
- a subset (or part) of ⁇ first joint TCI state, second joint TCI state ⁇ may be indicated.
- TCI states apply/supports for DL and UL (separate)
- a subset (or part) of ⁇ first DL TCI state, first UL TCI state, second DL TCI state, second UL TCI state ⁇ may be indicated.
- the network e.g., a base station
- the network may map the full set or a subset of ⁇ first joint TCI state, second joint TCI state ⁇ to code points in the TCI state field of a specified DCI format using a TCI state activation command (e.g., MAC CE).
- a TCI state activation command e.g., MAC CE
- the network e.g., a base station
- a TCI state activation command e.g., MAC CE
- the UE may update the first/second indicated joint/DL/UL TCI state according to the corresponding first/second joint/DL/UL TCI state mapped to the received TCI code point. If a subset of the unified TCI state is indicated to the UE, the UE may update the newly indicated TCI state and keep other TCI states (e.g., non-indicated TCI states) without updating them.
- TCI states e.g., non-indicated TCI states
- the UE may update the indicated joint TCI state and maintain the joint TCI state that was not indicated (e.g., the TCI state that is not updated) (see Figure 6).
- Figure 6 shows a case where the DCI indicates a subset (here, the first joint TCI state (TCI state #A2)) to a UE that applies/has the first joint TCI state (here, TCI state #A1) and the second joint TCI state (here, TCI state #B1).
- the UE may update the first joint TCI state (TCI state #A1 ⁇ TCI state #A2) and maintain the second joint TCI state.
- the UE may update the indicated DL/UL TCI states and maintain the non-indicated DL/UL TCI states (e.g., non-updated TCI states).
- the indication of a subset of unified TCI states may be determined based on the number of unified TCI states (or one joint TCI state, one DL/UL TCI state) mapped to the code point of the TCI state field included in the DCI.
- the UE may determine that a subset is indicated if only some of the TCI states (e.g., one for joint and two for separate) are mapped to the code point indicated in the TCI state field.
- the indication of a subset of unified TCI states may be determined based on a predetermined field (e.g., TCI state selection field) included in the DCI. For example, even if the TCI state field indicates a TCI codepoint to which multiple unified TCI states (e.g., two for joint, four for separate) are mapped, if the TCI state selection field indicates only some of the TCI states, the UE may determine that a subset is indicated.
- a predetermined field e.g., TCI state selection field
- the UE may control the update of the indicated TCI state based on the indicated TCI state or the received TCI code point.
- a list for the unified TCI state e.g., an upper layer parameter for the unified TCI state (dl-OrJointTCi-StattList)
- the UE may control the update of the indicated TCI state based on the indicated TCI state or the received TCI code point.
- the UE may update the ⁇ first,second ⁇ indicated TCI-State(s)/ ⁇ first,second ⁇ UL TCI ( ⁇ first,second ⁇ TCI-UL-State(s)) and may maintain the other ⁇ first,second ⁇ indicated TCI-State(s)/ ⁇ first,second ⁇ UL TCI ( ⁇ first,second ⁇ TCI-UL-State(s)) that are not updated by the received TCI codepoint.
- Second Embodiment An example of unified TCI state update control will be described when multiple (eg, two or more) unified TCI state indications are supported by the MAC CE for the UE.
- the second embodiment may be suitably applied when the indicated TCI state is indicated by a MAC CE.
- the second embodiment may be applied to at least one of a single DCI-based multi-TRP and a multi-DCI-based multi-TRP (or when multiple (e.g., two) CORESET pool indices are set).
- this is not limited to this, and the second embodiment may also be applied to a single TRP.
- the second embodiment may be applied alone or in combination with the first embodiment.
- the indicated TCI state (e.g., indicated joint/DL/UL TCI state) may be indicated by the MAC CE used for activation/deactivation of the unified TCI state. For example, if a predetermined number (e.g., one) of TCI states are indicated by the MAC CE for a serving cell/TRP (e.g., one TCI state is mapped to a TCI code point by the MAC CE), the indicated TCI state may be indicated by the MAC CE.
- a predetermined number e.g., one
- the indicated TCI state may be indicated by the MAC CE.
- first joint TCI state may apply to the first TRP
- second joint TCI state may apply to the second TRP.
- the MAC CE for activation/deactivation of the unified TCI state may indicate ⁇ first DL TCI state, first UL TCI state, second DL TCI state, second UL TCI state ⁇ to the UE.
- the first DL TCI state and the first UL TCI state may apply to the first TRP, and the second DL TCI state and the second UL TCI state may apply to the second TRP.
- some of the indicated TCI states may be indicated to the UE by the MAC CE.
- the multiple (e.g., two) indicated TCI states may be indicated by the DCI or by the MAC CE.
- the MAC CE may indicate a subset (or part) of ⁇ first joint TCI state, second joint TCI state ⁇ . If separate indication TCI states apply/supports for DL and UL (separate), the MAC CE may indicate a subset (or part) of ⁇ first DL TCI state, first UL TCI state, second DL TCI state, second UL TCI state ⁇ .
- the network e.g., a base station
- the network may map the full set or a subset of ⁇ first joint TCI state, second joint TCI state ⁇ to code points in the TCI state field of a specified DCI format using a TCI state activation command (e.g., MAC CE).
- a TCI state activation command e.g., MAC CE
- the network e.g., a base station
- a TCI state activation command e.g., MAC CE
- the UE may update the first/second indicated joint/DL/UL TCI state based on the TCI state indicated in the MAC CE. If the UE is indicated a subset of the unified TCI state, the UE may update the newly indicated TCI state by the MAC CE and keep the other TCI states (e.g., non-indicated TCI states) without updating them (see Figure 7).
- a predetermined number e.g., one
- the UE may update the first/second indicated joint/DL/UL TCI state based on the TCI state indicated in the MAC CE. If the UE is indicated a subset of the unified TCI state, the UE may update the newly indicated TCI state by the MAC CE and keep the other TCI states (e.g., non-indicated TCI states) without updating them (see Figure 7).
- Figure 7 shows a case where a subset (here, the first joint TCI state (TCI state #A2)) is indicated by the MAC CE to a UE that applies/has a first joint TCI state (here, TCI state #A1) and a second joint TCI state (here, TCI state #B1).
- the UE may update the first joint TCI state (TCI state #A1 ⁇ TCI state #A2) and maintain the second joint TCI state.
- the UE may control updating of the indicated TCI state based on the TCI state indicated by the MAC CE (e.g., a TCI State Activation Command) or the received TCI codepoint.
- a list for the unified TCI state e.g., a higher layer parameter for the unified TCI state (dl-OrJointTCi-StattList)
- the UE may control updating of the indicated TCI state based on the TCI state indicated by the MAC CE (e.g., a TCI State Activation Command) or the received TCI codepoint.
- the UE may update the ⁇ first,second ⁇ indicated TCI-State(s)/ ⁇ first,second ⁇ UL TCI ( ⁇ first,second ⁇ TCI-UL-State(s)) and may maintain other ⁇ first,second ⁇ indicated TCI-State(s)/ ⁇ first,second ⁇ UL TCI ( ⁇ first,second ⁇ TCI-UL-State(s)) that are not updated by the received TCI codepoint or the MAC CE.
- the MAC CE for TCI state activation may have the configuration shown in Figure 8, for example.
- Figure 8 may be applied to a MAC CE for activation of a unified TCI state for multi-DCI-based multi-TRP (or a unified TCI state when a CORESET pool index is set).
- a MAC CE for unified TCI state activation/deactivation supported in Rel. 18 and later may be applied.
- the CORESET pool index field included in the MAC CE may map the joint/DL/UL TCI status to the TCI codepoint in the TCI status field included in each DCI for each CORESET (or each TRP).
- the UE may receive ⁇ first,second ⁇ indicated TCI states ( ⁇ first,second ⁇ indicated TCI-State(s))/ ⁇ first,second ⁇ UL TCIs ( ⁇ first,second ⁇ TCI-UL-State(s)) in the TCI codepoint via the MAC CE for unified TCI state activation/deactivation.
- the UE may update the ⁇ first,second ⁇ indicated TCI-State(s)/ ⁇ first,second ⁇ UL TCI ( ⁇ first,second ⁇ TCI-UL-State(s)) and maintain the other ⁇ first,second ⁇ indicated TCI-State(s)/ ⁇ first,second ⁇ UL TCI ( ⁇ first,second ⁇ TCI-UL-State(s)) that are not updated within the TCI codepoint by the MAC CE.
- unified TCI state update control will be described when the MAC CE supports indication of unified TCI state (eg, UL TCI/DL TCI) to the UE.
- unified TCI state eg, UL TCI/DL TCI
- the third embodiment may be suitably applied when the indicated TCI state is indicated by the MAC CE.
- the third embodiment may be suitably applied when the UL TCI and DL TCI are indicated/updated by the MAC CE in a single TRP (e.g., the unified TCI state in Rel. 17).
- the third embodiment may be applied alone or in combination with the first embodiment/second embodiment.
- the UL TCI state/DL TCI state may be indicated by the MAC CE used for activation/deactivation of the unified TCI state. For example, if separate indicated TCI states are applied/supported for DL and UL in the unified TCI state of a single TRP (separate), the MAC CE maps the UL TCI state/DL TCI state (e.g., ⁇ UL TCI, DL TCI ⁇ ) to the TCI code point of the TCI state field included in the DCI.
- the UL TCI state/DL TCI state e.g., ⁇ UL TCI, DL TCI ⁇
- DL TCI ⁇ may be updated by the MAC CE. If only some of the TCI states are indicated by the MAC CE, the TCI states indicated by the MAC CE may be updated, and the other TCI states not indicated may be controlled not to be updated (the previously indicated TCI states may be maintained).
- the UE updates the indicated ⁇ UL TCI, DL TCI ⁇ and maintains the other indicated ⁇ UL TCI, DL TCI ⁇ that are not updated by the MAC CE.
- the MAC CE for TCI state activation may have the configuration shown in Figure 9, for example.
- Figure 9 may be a MAC CE for unified TCI state for a single TRP (for example, a MAC CE for unified TCI state activation/deactivation supported in Rel. 17).
- any information may be notified to the UE [from a network (NW) (e.g., a base station (BS)] (in other words, the UE receives any information from the BS) using physical layer signaling (e.g., DCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), a specific signal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, PDSCH, reference signal), or a combination thereof.
- NW network
- BS base station
- the MAC CE may be identified by including a new Logical Channel ID (LCID) in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.
- LCID Logical Channel ID
- the notification may be made by a specific field of the DCI, a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI) used to scramble the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) bits assigned to the DCI, the format of the DCI, etc.
- RNTI Radio Network Temporary Identifier
- CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
- notification of any information to the UE in the above-described embodiments may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.
- notification of any information from the UE [to the NW] may be performed using physical layer signaling (e.g., UCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), specific signals/channels (e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH, reference signals), or a combination thereof.
- physical layer signaling e.g., UCI
- higher layer signaling e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE
- specific signals/channels e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH, reference signals
- the MAC CE may be identified by including a new LCID in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.
- the notification may be transmitted using PUCCH or PUSCH.
- any information notification from the UE in the above-described embodiments may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.
- the specific process/operation/control/assumption/information(s) of at least one of the above-described embodiments may be applied (used) when one or more of the following conditions are met: - Upper layer parameters indicating the specific processing/operation/control/assumption/information are set; The specific process/action/control/assumption/information is determined based on relevant higher layer parameters; The specific process/action/control/assumption/information is specified/activated/triggered by MAC CE/DCI/UCI/resource/channel/RS, Reporting or supporting specific UE capabilities indicating (or relating to) the specific processes/actions/controls/assumptions/information; The application of the specific process/action/control/assumption/information is determined based on specific conditions.
- the specific UE capabilities may indicate at least one of the following: Supporting the above specific processes/actions/controls/assumptions/information (e.g., updates when a subset of the indicated TCI states is indicated); Supporting indication of a subset of the indicated TCI states; Supporting updating of some indication TCI states based on indication of a subset of indication TCI states.
- the above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that are applied across all frequencies (commonly regardless of frequency), capabilities for each frequency (e.g., one or a combination of cell, band, band combination, BWP, component carrier, etc.), capabilities for each frequency range (e.g., Frequency Range 1 (FR1), FR2, FR3, FR4, FR5, FR2-1, FR2-2), capabilities for each subcarrier spacing (SubCarrier Spacing (SCS)), or capabilities for each Feature Set (FS) or Feature Set Per Component-carrier (FSPC)).
- FR1 Frequency Range 1
- FR2 FR2, FR3, FR4, FR5, FR2-1, FR2-2
- SCS subcarrier Spacing
- FS Feature Set
- FSPC Feature Set Per Component-carrier
- the above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that apply across all duplexing methods (commonly regardless of the duplexing method), or may be capabilities for each duplexing method (e.g., Time Division Duplex (TDD) or Frequency Division Duplex (FDD)).
- TDD Time Division Duplex
- FDD Frequency Division Duplex
- the UE/BS may follow the behavior specified in existing 3GPP releases.
- Appendix 1 a receiver for receiving at least one of downlink control information indicating a plurality of Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) states and a MAC Control Element (MAC CE); a control unit that controls at least one of downlink reception and uplink transmission based on the plurality of indicated TCI states; A terminal in which, when the control unit receives information indicating a subset of a plurality of indicated TCI states, the control unit updates some of the indicated TCI states based on the information indicating the subset, and maintains the remaining indicated TCI states.
- TCI Transmission Configuration Indication
- MAC CE MAC Control Element
- the information indicating the subset of the plurality of indicated TCI states is downlink control information having a code point to which the subset of the plurality of indicated TCI states is mapped.
- the information indicating the subset of the plurality of indicated TCI states is a MAC CE that maps the subset of the plurality of indicated TCI states to a code point of a TCI state field included in downlink control information.
- the information indicating a subset of the plurality of indicated TCI states is a MAC CE that maps one of a TCI state for downlink and a TCI state for uplink to a code point of a TCI state field included in downlink control information.
- wireless communication system The configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure will be described below.
- communication is performed using any one of the wireless communication methods according to the above embodiments of the present disclosure or a combination thereof.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to one embodiment.
- Wireless communication system 1 (which may simply be referred to as system 1) may be a system that achieves communication using Long Term Evolution (LTE) specified by the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), 5th generation mobile communication system New Radio (5G NR), or the like.
- LTE Long Term Evolution
- 3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project
- 5G NR 5th generation mobile communication system New Radio
- the wireless communication system 1 may also support dual connectivity between multiple Radio Access Technologies (RATs) (Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity (MR-DC)).
- MR-DC may include dual connectivity between LTE (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and NR (E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC)), dual connectivity between NR and LTE (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity (NE-DC)), etc.
- RATs Radio Access Technologies
- MR-DC may include dual connectivity between LTE (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and NR (E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC)), dual connectivity between NR and LTE (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity (NE-DC)), etc.
- E-UTRA Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
- EN-DC E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity
- NE-DC NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity
- the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the master node (MN), and the NR base station (gNB) is the secondary node (SN).
- the NR base station (gNB) is the MN, and the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the SN.
- the wireless communication system 1 may support dual connectivity between multiple base stations within the same RAT (for example, dual connectivity where both the MN and SN are NR base stations (gNBs) (NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NN-DC))).
- dual connectivity where both the MN and SN are NR base stations (gNBs) (NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NN-DC))).
- gNBs NR base stations
- N-DC Dual Connectivity
- the wireless communication system 1 may include a base station 11 that forms a macrocell C1 with relatively wide coverage, and base stations 12 (12a-12c) that are located within the macrocell C1 and form a small cell C2 that is smaller than the macrocell C1.
- a user terminal 20 may be located within at least one of the cells. The location, number, shape, size, etc. of each cell and user terminal 20 are not limited to the configuration shown in the figure.
- base stations 11 and 12 are not to be distinguished, they will be collectively referred to as base station 10.
- the wireless communication system 1 may also utilize multi-input multi-output (MIMO).
- MIMO multi-input multi-output
- one cell may be formed by one antenna/base station 10, or by multiple antennas/base stations 10.
- One [virtual] cell (which may be called, for example, a supercell) may be made up of multiple [virtual] cells (which may be called, for example, subcells).
- a supercell may correspond to a cell with a fixed physical range
- a subcell may correspond to a cell with a quasi-static/dynamically changing physical range.
- the wireless communication system 1 may be called a cell-free system.
- the user terminal 20 may be connected to at least one of the multiple base stations 10.
- the user terminal 20 may use at least one of carrier aggregation (CA) using multiple component carriers (CC) and dual connectivity (DC).
- CA carrier aggregation
- CC component carriers
- DC dual connectivity
- Each CC may be included in at least one of a first frequency band (Frequency Range 1 (FR1)) and a second frequency band (Frequency Range 2 (FR2)).
- Macrocell C1 may be included in FR1
- small cell C2 may be included in FR2.
- FR1 may be a frequency band below 6 GHz (sub-6 GHz)
- FR2 may be a frequency band above 24 GHz (above-24 GHz). Note that the frequency bands and definitions of FR1 and FR2 are not limited to these, and for example, FR1 may correspond to a higher frequency band than FR2.
- the user terminal 20 may communicate using at least one of time division duplex (TDD) and frequency division duplex (FDD) in each CC.
- TDD time division duplex
- FDD frequency division duplex
- Multiple base stations 10 may be connected by wire (e.g., optical fiber compliant with the Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI), X2/Xn interface, etc.) or wirelessly (e.g., NR communication).
- wire e.g., optical fiber compliant with the Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI), X2/Xn interface, etc.
- NR communication e.g., NR communication
- base station 11 which corresponds to the upper station
- base station 12 which corresponds to the relay station (relay)
- IAB node Integrated Access Backhaul
- a base station 10 may be connected to the core network 30 directly or via another base station 10.
- the core network 30 may include, for example, at least one of an Evolved Packet Core (EPC), a 5G Core Network (5GCN), a Next Generation Core (NGC), etc.
- EPC Evolved Packet Core
- 5GCN 5G Core Network
- NGC Next Generation Core
- the core network 30 may include network functions (Network Functions (NF)) such as, for example, a User Plane Function (UPF), an Access and Mobility management Function (AMF), a Session Management Function (SMF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), a Data Network (DN), a Location Management Function (LMF), and Operation, Administration and Maintenance (Management) (OAM).
- NF Network Functions
- UPF User Plane Function
- AMF Access and Mobility management Function
- SMF Session Management Function
- UDM Unified Data Management
- AF Application Function
- DN Data Network
- LMF Location Management Function
- OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
- the user terminal 20 may be a terminal that supports at least one of the communication methods such as LTE, LTE-A, and 5G.
- a wireless access method based on Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing may be used.
- OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
- CP-OFDM Cyclic Prefix OFDM
- DFT-s-OFDM Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM
- OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
- SC-FDMA Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
- the radio access method may also be called a waveform.
- other radio access methods e.g., other single-carrier transmission methods, other multi-carrier transmission methods
- the downlink channel may be a downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, a broadcast channel (Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH)), a downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)), or the like.
- PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel
- PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
- PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
- an uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, an uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)), a random access channel (Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)), etc. may be used as an uplink channel.
- PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
- PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
- PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
- SIB System Information Block
- PDSCH User data, upper layer control information, System Information Block (SIB), etc.
- SIB System Information Block
- PUSCH User data, upper layer control information, etc.
- MIB Master Information Block
- PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
- Lower layer control information may be transmitted via the PDCCH.
- the lower layer control information may include, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI) including scheduling information for at least one of the PDSCH and PUSCH.
- DCI Downlink Control Information
- the DCI that schedules the PDSCH may be referred to as a DL assignment or DL DCI
- the DCI that schedules the PUSCH may be referred to as a UL grant or UL DCI.
- the PDSCH may be interpreted as DL data
- the PUSCH may be interpreted as UL data.
- a control resource set (CORESET) and a search space may be used to detect the PDCCH.
- the CORESET corresponds to the resources to search for DCI.
- the search space corresponds to the search area and search method for PDCCH candidates.
- One CORESET may be associated with one or more search spaces. The UE may monitor the CORESET associated with a certain search space based on the search space configuration.
- One search space may correspond to PDCCH candidates corresponding to one or more aggregation levels.
- One or more search spaces may be referred to as a search space set. Note that in this disclosure, “search space,” “search space set,” “search space setting,” “search space set setting,” “CORESET,” “CORESET setting,” etc. may be read interchangeably.
- the PUCCH may transmit uplink control information (UCI) including at least one of channel state information (CSI), delivery confirmation information (which may be called, for example, Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement (HARQ-ACK), ACK/NACK, etc.), and scheduling request (SR).
- UCI uplink control information
- CSI channel state information
- HARQ-ACK Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement
- ACK/NACK ACK/NACK, etc.
- SR scheduling request
- the PRACH may transmit a random access preamble for establishing a connection with a cell.
- downlink, uplink, etc. may be expressed without the word “link.”
- various channels may be expressed without the word “Physical” at the beginning.
- a synchronization signal (SS), a downlink reference signal (DL-RS), etc. may be transmitted.
- a cell-specific reference signal (CRS), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), a positioning reference signal (PRS), a phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), etc. may be transmitted.
- the synchronization signal may be, for example, at least one of a primary synchronization signal (PSS) and a secondary synchronization signal (SSS).
- a signal block including an SS (PSS, SSS) and a PBCH (and a DMRS for the PBCH) may be referred to as an SS/PBCH block, an SS block (SSB), etc.
- SS, SSB, etc. may also be referred to as a reference signal.
- a sounding reference signal (SRS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), etc. may be transmitted as an uplink reference signal (UL-RS).
- DMRS may also be called a user equipment-specific reference signal (UE-specific Reference Signal).
- the base station 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a base station according to an embodiment.
- the base station 10 includes a control unit 110, a transceiver unit 120, a transceiver antenna 130, and a transmission line interface 140. Note that the base station may include one or more of each of the control unit 110, the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission line interface 140.
- this example mainly shows the functional blocks that characterize the present embodiment, and it may be assumed that the base station 10 also has other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each unit described below may be omitted.
- the control unit 110 controls the entire base station 10.
- the control unit 110 can be composed of a controller, control circuit, etc., as described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.
- the control unit 110 may control signal generation, scheduling (e.g., resource allocation, mapping), etc.
- the control unit 110 may also control transmission and reception using the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140, measurements, etc.
- the control unit 110 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals, and transfer them to the transceiver unit 120.
- the control unit 110 may also perform call processing of communication channels (setting up, releasing, etc.), status management of the base station 10, management of radio resources, etc.
- the transceiver unit 120 may include a baseband unit 121, a radio frequency (RF) unit 122, and a measurement unit 123.
- the baseband unit 121 may include a transmission processing unit 1211 and a reception processing unit 1212.
- the transceiver unit 120 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure relates.
- the transceiver unit 120 may be configured as an integrated transceiver unit, or may be composed of a transmitter unit and a receiver unit.
- the transmitter unit may be composed of a transmission processing unit 1211 and an RF unit 122.
- the receiver unit may be composed of a reception processing unit 1212, an RF unit 122, and a measurement unit 123.
- the transmitting and receiving antenna 130 can be composed of an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.
- the transceiver 120 may transmit the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc.
- the transceiver 120 may also receive the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.
- the transceiver unit 120 may form at least one of the transmit beam and the receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.
- digital beamforming e.g., precoding
- analog beamforming e.g., phase rotation
- the transceiver 120 may perform Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer processing, Radio Link Control (RLC) layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), Medium Access Control (MAC) layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on data, control information, etc. obtained from the control unit 110, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.
- PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
- RLC Radio Link Control
- MAC Medium Access Control
- HARQ retransmission control e.g., HARQ retransmission control
- the transmitter/receiver unit 120 may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) processing (if necessary), Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
- transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) processing (if necessary), Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
- channel coding which may include error correction coding
- DFT Discrete Fourier Transform
- IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
- the transceiver unit 120 may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc. on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 130.
- the transceiver unit 120 may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 130.
- the transceiver unit 120 may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processing, Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal, thereby acquiring user data, etc.
- reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processing, Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal, thereby acquiring user data, etc.
- FFT Fast Fourier Transform
- IDFT Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform
- the transceiver 120 may perform measurements on the received signal.
- the measurement unit 123 may perform Radio Resource Management (RRM) measurements, Channel State Information (CSI) measurements, etc. based on the received signal.
- the measurement unit 123 may measure received power (e.g., Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP)), received quality (e.g., Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ), Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR), Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR)), signal strength (e.g., Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc.
- RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
- RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
- the measurement results may be output to the control unit 110.
- the transmission path interface 140 may transmit and receive signals (backhaul signaling) between devices included in the core network 30 (e.g., network nodes providing NF), other base stations 10, etc., and may acquire and transmit user data (user plane data), control plane data, etc. for the user terminal 20.
- devices included in the core network 30 e.g., network nodes providing NF
- other base stations 10, etc. may acquire and transmit user data (user plane data), control plane data, etc. for the user terminal 20.
- the transmitter and receiver of the base station 10 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitter/receiver 120, the transmitter/receiver antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140.
- the base station 10 may be separated into three elements: a radio unit (RU), a distributed unit (DU), and a central unit (CU).
- the RU may perform RF processing (digital beamforming, digital-to-analog conversion, analog beamforming, etc.) and lower-level physical layer functions (precoding, IFFT, FFT, etc.).
- the DU may perform higher-level physical layer functions (encoding to resource element mapping, etc.), MAC layer functions, and RLC layer functions.
- the CU may perform PDCP layer, Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) layer, and RRC layer functions.
- SDAP Service Data Adaptation Protocol
- the base station 10 may include a single device that implements all of the functions of the RU, DU, and CU, or may include multiple devices that each implement some of the functions of the RU, DU, and CU and are connected to each other.
- the base station 10 may be interchangeably referred to as the RU/DU/CU.
- the transceiver unit 120 may transmit at least one of downlink control information and MAC control elements (MAC CEs) indicating multiple Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) states.
- MAC CEs MAC control elements
- TCI Transmission Configuration Indication
- the control unit 110 may control at least one of downlink reception and uplink transmission based on the multiple indicated TCI states.
- the control unit 110 may update some of the multiple indicated TCI states and maintain the remaining indicated TCI states.
- the user terminal 12 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to one embodiment.
- the user terminal 20 includes a control unit 210, a transceiver unit 220, and a transceiver antenna 230. Note that the user terminal 20 may include one or more of each of the control unit 210, the transceiver unit 220, and the transceiver antenna 230.
- this example mainly shows the functional blocks that characterize the present embodiment, and the user terminal 20 may also have other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each unit described below may be omitted.
- the control unit 210 controls the entire user terminal 20.
- the control unit 210 can be composed of a controller, a control circuit, etc., as described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.
- the control unit 210 may control signal generation, mapping, etc.
- the control unit 210 may also control transmission and reception, measurement, etc. using the transmission and reception unit 220 and the transmission and reception antenna 230.
- the control unit 210 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals and transfer them to the transmission and reception unit 220.
- the transceiver unit 220 may include a baseband unit 221, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223.
- the baseband unit 221 may include a transmission processing unit 2211 and a reception processing unit 2212.
- the transceiver unit 220 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on common understanding in the technical field related to this disclosure.
- the transceiver unit 220 may be configured as an integrated transceiver unit, or may be composed of a transmitter unit and a receiver unit.
- the transmitter unit may be composed of a transmission processing unit 2211 and an RF unit 222.
- the receiver unit may be composed of a reception processing unit 2212, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223.
- the transmitting and receiving antenna 230 can be configured as an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.
- the transceiver unit 220 may receive the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc.
- the transceiver unit 220 may also transmit the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.
- the transceiver unit 220 may form at least one of the transmit beam and the receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.
- digital beamforming e.g., precoding
- analog beamforming e.g., phase rotation
- the transceiver unit 220 may perform PDCP layer processing, RLC layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), MAC layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on data, control information, etc. obtained from the control unit 210, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.
- RLC layer processing e.g., RLC retransmission control
- MAC layer processing e.g., HARQ retransmission control
- the transceiver unit 220 may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, DFT processing (if necessary), IFFT processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
- transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, DFT processing (if necessary), IFFT processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
- Whether or not to apply DFT processing may be based on the settings for transform precoding. If transform precoding is enabled for a certain channel (e.g., PUSCH), the transceiver unit 220 (transmission processing unit 2211) may perform DFT processing as the transmission processing to transmit the channel using a DFT-s-OFDM waveform; if not, it may not be necessary to perform DFT processing as the transmission processing.
- transform precoding is enabled for a certain channel (e.g., PUSCH)
- the transceiver unit 220 transmission processing unit 2211
- the transceiver unit 220 may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc. on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 230.
- the transceiver unit 220 may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 230.
- the transceiver unit 220 may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, FFT processing, IDFT processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal to acquire user data, etc.
- reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, FFT processing, IDFT processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal to acquire user data, etc.
- the transceiver unit 220 may perform measurements on the received signal. For example, the measurement unit 223 may perform RRM measurements, CSI measurements, etc. based on the received signal.
- the measurement unit 223 may measure received power (e.g., RSRP), received quality (e.g., RSRQ, SINR, SNR), signal strength (e.g., RSSI), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc.
- the measurement results may be output to the control unit 210.
- the measurement unit 223 may derive channel measurements for CSI calculation based on channel measurement resources.
- the channel measurement resources may be, for example, non-zero power (NZP) CSI-RS resources.
- the measurement unit 223 may also derive interference measurements for CSI calculation based on interference measurement resources.
- the interference measurement resources may be at least one of NZP CSI-RS resources for interference measurement, CSI-Interference Measurement (IM) resources, etc.
- CSI-IM may also be referred to as CSI-Interference Management (IM) or may be interchangeably read as Zero Power (ZP) CSI-RS.
- CSI-RS, NZP CSI-RS, ZP CSI-RS, CSI-IM, CSI-SSB, etc. may be interchangeable.
- the transmitter and receiver of the user terminal 20 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitter/receiver 220 and the transmitter/receiver antenna 230.
- the transceiver unit 220 may receive at least one of downlink control information and MAC control elements (MAC CEs) indicating multiple Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) states.
- MAC CEs MAC control elements
- TCI Transmission Configuration Indication
- the control unit 210 may control at least one of downlink reception and uplink transmission based on the multiple indicated TCI states.
- the control unit 210 may update some of the indicated TCI states based on the information indicating the subset, and may control the remaining indicated TCI states to be maintained.
- the information indicating a subset of the multiple indicated TCI states may be downlink control information having a code point to which the subset of the multiple indicated TCI states is mapped.
- the information indicating a subset of the multiple indicated TCI states may be a MAC CE that maps the subset of the multiple indicated TCI states to a code point in the TCI state field included in the downlink control information.
- the information indicating a subset of multiple indicated TCI states may be a MAC CE that maps one of the downlink TCI state and the uplink TCI state to a code point in the TCI state field included in the downlink control information.
- each functional block may be realized using a single device that is physically or logically coupled, or may be realized using two or more physically or logically separated devices that are directly or indirectly connected (e.g., wired, wireless, etc.) and these multiple devices.
- the functional block may also be realized by combining software with the single device or multiple devices.
- functions include, but are not limited to, judgment, determination, judgment, calculation, computation, processing, derivation, investigation, search, confirmation, reception, transmission, output, access, resolution, selection, election, establishment, comparison, assumption, expectation, deeming, broadcasting, notifying, communicating, forwarding, configuring, reconfiguring, allocating, mapping, and assignment.
- a functional block (component) that performs transmission functions may be called a transmitting unit, transmitter, etc.
- transmitting unit transmitter
- a base station, a user terminal, etc. in one embodiment of the present disclosure may function as a computer that performs processing of the wireless communication method of the present disclosure.
- Figure 13 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to one embodiment.
- the above-mentioned base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be physically configured as a computer device including a processor 1001, memory 1002, storage 1003, a communication device 1004, an input device 1005, an output device 1006, a bus 1007, etc.
- the hardware configuration of the base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be configured to include one or more of the devices shown in the figures, or may be configured to exclude some of the devices.
- processor 1001 may be implemented by one or more chips.
- the functions of the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 are realized, for example, by loading specific software (programs) onto hardware such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002, causing the processor 1001 to perform calculations, control communications via the communication device 1004, and control at least one of reading and writing data from and to the memory 1002 and storage 1003.
- the processor 1001 for example, runs an operating system to control the entire computer.
- the processor 1001 may be configured as a central processing unit (CPU) that includes an interface with peripheral devices, a control unit, an arithmetic unit, registers, etc.
- CPU central processing unit
- control unit e.g., arithmetic unit
- registers e.g., arithmetic unit
- at least a portion of the above-mentioned control unit 110 (210), transceiver unit 120 (220), etc. may be realized by the processor 1001.
- the processor 1001 reads programs (program code), software modules, data, etc. from at least one of the storage 1003 and the communication device 1004 into the memory 1002, and executes various processes in accordance with these.
- the programs used are those that cause a computer to execute at least some of the operations described in the above-described embodiments.
- the control unit 110 (210) may be implemented by a control program stored in the memory 1002 and running on the processor 1001, and similar implementations may be used for other functional blocks.
- Memory 1002 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of, for example, at least one of Read Only Memory (ROM), Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), Electrically EPROM (EEPROM), Random Access Memory (RAM), or other suitable storage medium.
- ROM Read Only Memory
- EPROM Erasable Programmable ROM
- EEPROM Electrically EPROM
- RAM Random Access Memory
- Memory 1002 may also be referred to as a register, cache, main memory, etc.
- Memory 1002 can store executable programs (program code), software modules, etc. for implementing a wireless communication method according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
- Storage 1003 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of at least one of a flexible disk, a floppy disk, a magneto-optical disk (e.g., a compact disc (Compact Disc ROM (CD-ROM)), a digital versatile disc, a Blu-ray disc), a removable disk, a hard disk drive, a smart card, a flash memory device (e.g., a card, a stick, a key drive), a magnetic stripe, a database, a server, or other suitable storage medium.
- Storage 1003 may also be referred to as an auxiliary storage device.
- the communication device 1004 is hardware (transmitting/receiving device) for communicating between computers via at least one of a wired network and a wireless network, and is also referred to as a network device, network controller, network card, or communication module.
- the communication device 1004 may be configured to include high-frequency switches, duplexers, filters, frequency synthesizers, etc. to implement at least one of frequency division duplex (FDD) and time division duplex (TDD).
- FDD frequency division duplex
- TDD time division duplex
- the above-mentioned transmitter/receiver unit 120 (220), transmitter/receiver antenna 130 (230), etc. may be implemented by the communication device 1004.
- the transmitter/receiver unit 120 (220) may be implemented as a transmitter unit 120a (220a) and a receiver unit 120b (220b) that are physically or logically separated.
- the input device 1005 is an input device (e.g., a keyboard, mouse, microphone, switch, button, sensor, etc.) that accepts input from the outside.
- the output device 1006 is an output device (e.g., a display, speaker, Light Emitting Diode (LED) lamp, etc.) that outputs to the outside. Note that the input device 1005 and the output device 1006 may be integrated into one device (e.g., a touch panel).
- each device such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002, is connected by a bus 1007 for communicating information.
- the bus 1007 may be configured using a single bus, or may be configured using different buses between each device.
- the base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be configured to include hardware such as a microprocessor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a field programmable gate array (FPGA), and some or all of the functional blocks may be realized using this hardware.
- the processor 1001 may be implemented using at least one of these pieces of hardware.
- devices included in the core network 30 may also be realized using the above-mentioned functional block/hardware configuration.
- a channel, a symbol, and a signal may be interchangeable.
- a signal may also be a message.
- a reference signal may be abbreviated as RS, and may also be called a pilot, pilot signal, etc. depending on the applicable standard.
- a component carrier may also be called a cell, frequency carrier, carrier frequency, etc.
- a radio frame may be composed of one or more periods (frames) in the time domain.
- Each of the one or more periods (frames) constituting a radio frame may be called a subframe.
- a subframe may be composed of one or more slots in the time domain.
- a subframe may have a fixed time length (e.g., 1 ms) that is independent of numerology.
- numerology may be a communication parameter applied to at least one of the transmission and reception of a signal or channel.
- Numerology may indicate, for example, at least one of the following: subcarrier spacing (SCS), bandwidth, symbol length, cyclic prefix length, transmission time interval (TTI), number of symbols per TTI, radio frame structure, specific filtering processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the frequency domain, and specific windowing processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the time domain.
- SCS subcarrier spacing
- TTI transmission time interval
- radio frame structure specific filtering processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the frequency domain
- specific windowing processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the time domain specific windowing processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the time domain.
- a slot may consist of one or more symbols in the time domain (such as Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols or Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) symbols).
- a slot may also be a time unit based on numerology.
- a slot may include multiple minislots. Each minislot may consist of one or more symbols in the time domain. A minislot may also be called a subslot. A minislot may consist of fewer symbols than a slot.
- a PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted in a time unit larger than a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type A.
- a PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted using a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type B.
- Radio frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol all represent time units for transmitting signals. Radio frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol may each be referred to by a different name. Note that the time units used in this disclosure, such as frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol, may be interchangeable.
- one subframe may be referred to as a TTI, or multiple consecutive subframes may be referred to as a TTI, or one slot or one minislot may be referred to as a TTI.
- at least one of a subframe and a TTI may be a subframe (1 ms) as in existing LTE, or may be a period shorter than 1 ms (e.g., 1-13 symbols), or may be a period longer than 1 ms.
- the unit representing a TTI may be called a slot, minislot, etc. instead of a subframe.
- TTI refers to, for example, the smallest time unit for scheduling in wireless communication.
- a base station performs scheduling to allocate radio resources (such as the frequency bandwidth and transmission power that can be used by each user terminal) to each user terminal in TTI units.
- radio resources such as the frequency bandwidth and transmission power that can be used by each user terminal
- TTI is not limited to this.
- the TTI may be a transmission time unit for a channel-encoded data packet (transport block), code block, code word, etc., or may be a processing unit for scheduling, link adaptation, etc.
- the time interval e.g., number of symbols
- the time interval to which a transport block, code block, code word, etc. is actually mapped may be shorter than the TTI.
- one slot or one minislot is called a TTI
- one or more TTIs may be the smallest time unit for scheduling.
- the number of slots (minislots) that make up the smallest time unit for scheduling may be controlled.
- a TTI with a time length of 1 ms may be called a regular TTI (TTI in 3GPP Rel. 8-12), normal TTI, long TTI, regular subframe, normal subframe, long subframe, slot, etc.
- a TTI shorter than a regular TTI may be called a shortened TTI, short TTI, partial TTI (partial or fractional TTI), shortened subframe, short subframe, minislot, subslot, slot, etc.
- a long TTI (e.g., a normal TTI, subframe, etc.) may be interpreted as a TTI having a time length of more than 1 ms
- a short TTI e.g., a shortened TTI, etc.
- a resource block is a resource allocation unit in the time domain and frequency domain, and may include one or more consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain.
- the number of subcarriers included in an RB may be the same regardless of numerology, and may be, for example, 12.
- the number of subcarriers included in an RB may also be determined based on numerology.
- an RB may include one or more symbols in the time domain and may be one slot, one minislot, one subframe, or one TTI in length.
- One TTI, one subframe, etc. may each be composed of one or more resource blocks.
- one or more RBs may also be referred to as a physical resource block (PRB), a sub-carrier group (SCG), a resource element group (REG), a PRB pair, an RB pair, etc.
- PRB physical resource block
- SCG sub-carrier group
- REG resource element group
- PRB pair an RB pair, etc.
- a resource block may be composed of one or more resource elements (REs).
- REs resource elements
- one RE may be a radio resource region of one subcarrier and one symbol.
- a Bandwidth Part (which may also be referred to as a partial bandwidth) may represent a subset of contiguous common resource blocks (RBs) for a given numerology on a given carrier.
- the common RBs may be identified by the index of the RB relative to the common reference point of the carrier.
- PRBs may be defined in a BWP and numbered within that BWP.
- BWPs may include UL BWPs (BWPs for UL) and DL BWPs (BWPs for DL).
- BWPs for UL
- BWPs for DL DL BWPs
- One or more BWPs may be configured for a UE within one carrier.
- At least one of the configured BWPs may be active, and the UE may not expect to transmit or receive a given signal/channel outside the active BWP.
- BWP bitmap
- the structures of the radio frames, subframes, slots, minislots, and symbols described above are merely examples.
- the number of subframes included in a radio frame, the number of slots per subframe or radio frame, the number of minislots included in a slot, the number of symbols and RBs included in a slot or minislot, the number of subcarriers included in an RB, as well as the number of symbols in a TTI, symbol length, and cyclic prefix (CP) length can be changed in various ways.
- radio resources may be indicated by a predetermined index.
- the names used for parameters and the like in this disclosure are not limiting in any way. Furthermore, the mathematical formulas and the like using these parameters may differ from those explicitly disclosed in this disclosure.
- the various channels (PUCCH, PDCCH, etc.) and information elements may be identified by any suitable names, and therefore the various names assigned to these various channels and information elements are not limiting in any way.
- the information, signals, etc. described in this disclosure may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies.
- data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, chips, etc. that may be referred to throughout the above description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or magnetic particles, optical fields or photons, or any combination thereof.
- Information, signals, etc. may be output from a higher layer to a lower layer and/or from a lower layer to a higher layer. Information, signals, etc. may be input/output via multiple network nodes.
- Input and output information, signals, etc. may be stored in a specific location (for example, memory) or may be managed using a management table. Input and output information, signals, etc. may be overwritten, updated, or added to. Output information, signals, etc. may be deleted. Input information, signals, etc. may be sent to another device.
- any first device e.g., UE/base station
- any second device e.g., base station/UE
- the notification of information is not limited to the aspects/embodiments described in this disclosure, and may be performed using other methods.
- the notification of information in this disclosure may be performed using physical layer signaling (e.g., Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI))), higher layer signaling (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, broadcast information (Master Information Block (MIB), System Information Block (SIB)), etc.), Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling), other signals, or a combination of these.
- DCI Downlink Control Information
- UCI Uplink Control Information
- RRC Radio Resource Control
- MIB Master Information Block
- SIB System Information Block
- MAC Medium Access Control
- L1/L2 control signal Layer 1/Layer 2
- L1 control information L1 control signal
- RRC signaling may also be referred to as RRC messages, such as RRC Connection Setup messages or RRC Connection Reconfiguration messages.
- MAC signaling may also be notified using, for example, MAC Control Elements (CEs).
- CEs MAC Control Elements
- notification of specified information is not limited to explicit notification, but may also be done implicitly (e.g., by not notifying the specified information or by notifying other information).
- the determination may be made based on a value represented by a single bit (0 or 1), a Boolean value represented as true or false, or a comparison of numerical values (for example, a comparison with a predetermined value).
- Software shall be construed broadly to mean instructions, instruction sets, code, code segments, program code, programs, subprograms, software modules, applications, software applications, software packages, routines, subroutines, objects, executable files, threads of execution, procedures, functions, etc., whether referred to as software, firmware, middleware, microcode, hardware description language, or otherwise.
- software, instructions, information, etc. may be transmitted and received via a transmission medium.
- a transmission medium such as coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, or Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
- wired technology such as coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, or Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
- wireless technology such as infrared or microwave
- Network may refer to devices included in the network (e.g., base stations).
- precoding "precoding weight”
- QCL Quality of Co-Location
- TCI state Transmission Configuration Indication state
- spatialal relation "spatial domain filter,” “transmit power,” “phase rotation,” “antenna port,” “layer,” “number of layers,” “rank,” “resource,” “resource set,” “beam,” “beam width,” “beam angle,” “antenna,” “antenna element,” “panel,” “UE panel,” “transmitting entity,” “receiving entity,” etc.
- the term "antenna port” may be interchangeably read as an antenna port for any signal/channel (e.g., a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) port).
- the term “resource” may be interchangeably read as a resource for any signal/channel (e.g., a reference signal resource, an SRS resource, etc.).
- the resource may include time/frequency/code/space/power resources.
- the spatial domain transmit filter may include at least one of a spatial domain transmission filter and a spatial domain reception filter.
- the above groups may include, for example, at least one of a spatial relationship group, a Code Division Multiplexing (CDM) group, a Reference Signal (RS) group, a Control Resource Set (CORESET) group, a PUCCH group, an antenna port group (e.g., a DMRS port group), a layer group, a resource group, a beam group, an antenna group, a panel group, etc.
- CDM Code Division Multiplexing
- RS Reference Signal
- CORESET Control Resource Set
- beam SRS Resource Indicator (SRI), CORESET, CORESET pool, PDSCH, PUSCH, codeword (CW), transport block (TB), RS, etc. may be read as interchangeable terms.
- TCI state downlink TCI state
- DL TCI state downlink TCI state
- UL TCI state uplink TCI state
- unified TCI state common TCI state
- joint TCI state may be interpreted interchangeably.
- index identifier
- indicator indication
- resource ID identifier
- sequence list, set, group, cluster, and subset
- TCI state ID may be interchangeable.
- TCI state ID may be interchangeable as “set of spatial relationship information (TCI state)", “one or more pieces of spatial relationship information”, etc.
- TCI state and TCI may be interchangeable.
- Spatial relationship information and spatial relationship may be interchangeable.
- Base Station BS
- Radio Base Station Fire Base Station
- NodeB NodeB
- eNB eNodeB
- gNB gNodeB
- Access Point "Transmission Point (TP),” “Reception Point (RP),” “Transmission/Reception Point (TRP),” “Panel,” “Cell,” “Sector,” “Cell Group,” “Carrier,” and “Component Carrier”
- Base stations may also be referred to by terms such as macrocell, small cell, femtocell, and picocell.
- a base station can accommodate one or more (e.g., three) cells.
- a base station accommodates multiple cells, the entire coverage area of the base station can be divided into multiple smaller areas, and each smaller area can also be provided with communication services by a base station subsystem (e.g., a small indoor base station (Remote Radio Head (RRH))).
- RRH Remote Radio Head
- the terms "cell” or “sector” refer to part or all of the coverage area of at least one of the base station and base station subsystems that provide communication services within this coverage area.
- a base station transmitting information to a terminal may be interpreted as the base station instructing the terminal to control/operate based on that information.
- MS Mobile Station
- UE User Equipment
- a mobile station may also be referred to as a subscriber station, mobile unit, subscriber unit, wireless unit, remote unit, mobile device, wireless device, wireless communication device, remote device, mobile subscriber station, access terminal, mobile terminal, wireless terminal, remote terminal, handset, user agent, mobile client, client, or some other suitable terminology.
- At least one of the base station and the mobile station may be referred to as a transmitting device, a receiving device, a wireless communication device, etc.
- at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be a device mounted on a moving object, the moving object itself, etc.
- the mobile body in question refers to an object that can move at any speed, and of course also includes cases where the mobile body is stationary.
- Examples of the mobile body in question include, but are not limited to, vehicles, transport vehicles, automobiles, motorcycles, bicycles, connected cars, excavators, bulldozers, wheel loaders, dump trucks, forklifts, trains, buses, handcarts, rickshaws, ships and other watercraft, airplanes, rockets, satellites, drones, multicopters, quadcopters, balloons, and objects mounted on these.
- the mobile body in question may also be a mobile body that moves autonomously based on operation commands.
- the moving object may be a vehicle (e.g., a car, an airplane, etc.), an unmanned moving object (e.g., a drone, a self-driving car, etc.), or a robot (manned or unmanned).
- a vehicle e.g., a car, an airplane, etc.
- an unmanned moving object e.g., a drone, a self-driving car, etc.
- a robot manned or unmanned.
- at least one of the base station and the mobile station may also include devices that do not necessarily move during communication operations.
- at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be an Internet of Things (IoT) device such as a sensor.
- IoT Internet of Things
- FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a vehicle according to one embodiment.
- the vehicle 40 includes a drive unit 41, a steering unit 42, an accelerator pedal 43, a brake pedal 44, a shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, an axle 48, an electronic control unit 49, various sensors (including a current sensor 50, an RPM sensor 51, an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration sensor 54, an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a brake pedal sensor 56, a shift lever sensor 57, and an object detection sensor 58), an information service unit 59, and a communication module 60.
- various sensors including a current sensor 50, an RPM sensor 51, an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration sensor 54, an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a brake pedal sensor 56, a shift lever sensor 57, and an object detection sensor 58
- an information service unit 59 including a communication module 60.
- the drive unit 41 is composed of, for example, at least one of an engine, a motor, or a hybrid of an engine and a motor.
- the steering unit 42 includes at least a steering wheel (also called a handle) and is configured to steer at least one of the front wheels 46 and the rear wheels 47 based on the operation of the steering wheel operated by the user.
- the electronic control unit 49 is composed of a microprocessor 61, memory (ROM, RAM) 62, and a communication port (e.g., an input/output (IO) port) 63. Signals are input to the electronic control unit 49 from various sensors 50-58 provided in the vehicle.
- the electronic control unit 49 may also be called an Electronic Control Unit (ECU).
- ECU Electronic Control Unit
- Signals from the various sensors 50-58 include a current signal from a current sensor 50 that senses the motor current, a rotation speed signal for the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 obtained by a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure signal for the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 obtained by an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed signal obtained by a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration signal obtained by an acceleration sensor 54, a depression amount signal for the accelerator pedal 43 obtained by an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a depression amount signal for the brake pedal 44 obtained by a brake pedal sensor 56, an operation signal for the shift lever 45 obtained by a shift lever sensor 57, and a detection signal for detecting obstacles, vehicles, pedestrians, etc. obtained by an object detection sensor 58.
- the information service unit 59 is composed of various devices, such as a car navigation system, audio system, speakers, displays, televisions, and radios, that provide (output) various information such as driving information, traffic information, and entertainment information, as well as one or more ECUs that control these devices.
- the information service unit 59 uses information obtained from external devices via the communication module 60, etc., to provide various information/services (e.g., multimedia information/multimedia services) to the occupants of the vehicle 40.
- various information/services e.g., multimedia information/multimedia services
- the information service unit 59 may include input devices (e.g., keyboards, mice, microphones, switches, buttons, sensors, touch panels, etc.) that accept input from the outside, and may also include output devices (e.g., displays, speakers, LED lamps, touch panels, etc.) that output to the outside.
- input devices e.g., keyboards, mice, microphones, switches, buttons, sensors, touch panels, etc.
- output devices e.g., displays, speakers, LED lamps, touch panels, etc.
- the driving assistance system unit 64 is composed of various devices that provide functions to prevent accidents and reduce the driver's driving burden, such as millimeter-wave radar, Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR), cameras, positioning locators (e.g., Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)), map information (e.g., High Definition (HD) maps, Autonomous Vehicle (AV) maps), gyro systems (e.g., Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU) and Inertial Navigation System (INS)), artificial intelligence (AI) chips, and AI processors, as well as one or more ECUs that control these devices.
- the driving assistance system unit 64 also transmits and receives various information via the communication module 60 to realize driving assistance or autonomous driving functions.
- the communication module 60 can communicate with the microprocessor 61 and components of the vehicle 40 via the communication port 63.
- the communication module 60 transmits and receives data (information) via the communication port 63 between the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, the microprocessor 61 and memory (ROM, RAM) 62 in the electronic control unit 49, and the various sensors 50-58, all of which are provided on the vehicle 40.
- the communication module 60 is a communication device that can be controlled by the microprocessor 61 of the electronic control unit 49 and can communicate with external devices. For example, it sends and receives various information to and from external devices via wireless communication.
- the communication module 60 may be located either inside or outside the electronic control unit 49.
- the external device may be, for example, the base station 10 or user terminal 20 described above.
- the communication module 60 may also be, for example, at least one of the base station 10 and user terminal 20 described above (or may function as at least one of the base station 10 and user terminal 20).
- the communications module 60 may transmit at least one of the following to an external device via wireless communication: signals from the various sensors 50-58 described above input to the electronic control unit 49; information obtained based on these signals; and information based on input from the outside (user) obtained via the information service unit 59.
- the electronic control unit 49, the various sensors 50-58, the information service unit 59, etc. may also be referred to as input units that accept input.
- the PUSCH transmitted by the communications module 60 may include information based on the above input.
- the communications module 60 receives various information (traffic information, traffic signal information, vehicle-to-vehicle information, etc.) transmitted from external devices and displays it on the information service unit 59 installed in the vehicle.
- the information service unit 59 may also be called an output unit that outputs information (for example, outputs information to a device such as a display or speaker based on the PDSCH received by the communications module 60 (or data/information decoded from the PDSCH)).
- the communication module 60 stores various information received from external devices in memory 62 that can be used by the microprocessor 61. Based on the information stored in memory 62, the microprocessor 61 may control the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, various sensors 50-58, and other components provided on the vehicle 40.
- the base station in the present disclosure may be read as a user terminal.
- the aspects/embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to a configuration in which communication between a base station and a user terminal is replaced with communication between multiple user terminals (which may be called, for example, Device-to-Device (D2D) or Vehicle-to-Everything (V2X)).
- the user terminal 20 may be configured to have the functions possessed by the base station 10 described above.
- terms such as “uplink” and “downlink” may be read as terms corresponding to communication between terminals (for example, "sidelink”).
- terms such as uplink channel and downlink channel may be read as sidelink channel.
- the term "user terminal” in this disclosure may be interpreted as “base station.”
- the base station 10 may be configured to have the functions possessed by the user terminal 20 described above.
- operations described as being performed by a base station may in some cases also be performed by its upper node.
- a network including one or more network nodes having base stations it is clear that various operations performed for communication with terminals may be performed by the base station, one or more network nodes other than the base station (such as, but not limited to, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) or a Serving-Gateway (S-GW)), or a combination thereof.
- MME Mobility Management Entity
- S-GW Serving-Gateway
- each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be used alone, in combination, or switched between depending on the implementation. Furthermore, the processing procedures, sequences, flowcharts, etc. of each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be rearranged as long as they are consistent. For example, the methods described in this disclosure present various step elements in an exemplary order, and are not limited to the specific order presented.
- LTE Long Term Evolution
- LTE-A LTE-Advanced
- LTE-B LTE-Beyond
- SUPER 3G IMT-Advanced
- 4th generation mobile communication system 4th generation mobile communication system
- 5G 5th generation mobile communication system
- 6G 6th generation mobile communication system
- xG x is, for example, an integer or decimal number
- Future Radio Access FX
- GSM Global System for Mobile communications
- CDMA2000 Code Division Multiple Access
- UMB Ultra Mobile Broadband
- IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi
- IEEE 802.16 WiMAX (registered trademark)
- IEEE 802.20 Ultra-WideBand (UWB), Bluetooth (registered trademark), or other appropriate wireless communication methods, as
- the phrase “based on” does not mean “based only on,” unless expressly stated otherwise. In other words, the phrase “based on” means both “based only on” and “based at least on.”
- any reference to an element using a designation such as "first,” “second,” etc. does not generally limit the quantity or order of those elements. These designations may be used in this disclosure as a convenient method of distinguishing between two or more elements. Thus, a reference to a first and a second element does not imply that only two elements may be employed or that the first element must in some way precede the second element.
- determining may encompass a wide variety of actions. For example, “determining” may be considered to be judging, calculating, computing, processing, deriving, investigating, looking up, search, inquiry (e.g., searching in a table, database, or other data structure), ascertaining, etc.
- determination may be considered to be “determining” receiving (e.g., receiving information), transmitting (e.g., sending information), input, output, accessing (e.g., accessing data in memory), etc.
- judgment (decision) may be considered to mean “judging (deciding)” resolving, selecting, choosing, establishing, comparing, etc.
- judgment (decision) may be considered to mean “judging (deciding)” some kind of action.
- judgment (decision) may be read interchangeably with the above-mentioned actions.
- expect may be interchangeably read as “be expected.”
- "expect(s)" (“" may be expressed, for example, as a that clause, a to-infinitive, etc.) may be interchangeably read as “be expected" or “does... (if the above "! is a to-infinitive, a verb with "to").”
- "does not expect" may be interchangeably read as "be not expected" or "does not...
- apparatus A is not expected
- apparatus B may be interchangeably read as "apparatus B other than apparatus A does not expect" from apparatus A (for example, if apparatus A is a UE, apparatus B may be a base station).
- maximum transmit power used in this disclosure may refer to the maximum value of transmit power, the nominal UE maximum transmit power, or the rated UE maximum transmit power.
- connection means any direct or indirect connection or coupling between two or more elements, and may include the presence of one or more intermediate elements between two elements that are “connected” or “coupled” to each other.
- the coupling or connection between elements may be physical, logical, or a combination thereof. For example, "connected” may be read as "access.”
- a and B are different may mean “A and B are different from each other.” Note that this term may also mean “A and B are each different from C.” Terms such as “separate” and “combined” may also be interpreted in the same way as “different.”
- expressions such as "when A, B,” “if A, (then) B,” “B upon A,” “B in response to A,” “B based on A,” “B during/while A,” “B before A,” “B at (the same time as)/on A,” “B after A,” “B since A,” and “B until A” may be interchangeable.
- a and B may be replaced with other appropriate expressions, such as nouns, gerunds, and regular sentences, depending on the context.
- the time difference between A and B may be nearly zero (immediately after or immediately before).
- a time offset may also be applied to the time at which A occurs.
- “A” may be interpreted interchangeably as “before/after the time offset at which A occurs.”
- the time offset (e.g., one or more symbols/slots) may be predefined or may be determined by the UE based on signaled information.
- timing time, duration, time instance, any time unit (e.g., slot, subslot, symbol, subframe), period, occasion, and resource may be interpreted interchangeably.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本開示は、次世代移動通信システムにおける端末、無線通信方法及び基地局に関する。 This disclosure relates to terminals, wireless communication methods, and base stations in next-generation mobile communication systems.
Universal Mobile Telecommunications System(UMTS)ネットワークにおいて、更なる高速データレート、低遅延などを目的としてLong Term Evolution(LTE)が仕様化された(非特許文献1)。また、LTE(Third Generation Partnership Project(3GPP(登録商標)) Release(Rel.)8、9)の更なる大容量、高度化などを目的として、LTE-Advanced(3GPP Rel.10-14)が仕様化された。 Long Term Evolution (LTE) was specified for Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) networks with the aim of achieving even higher data rates and lower latency (Non-Patent Document 1). Furthermore, LTE-Advanced (3GPP Rel. 10-14) was specified with the aim of achieving even greater capacity and sophistication over LTE (Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP (registered trademark)) Release (Rel.) 8 and 9).
LTEの後継システム(例えば、5th generation mobile communication system(5G)、5G+(plus)、6th generation mobile communication system(6G)、New Radio(NR)、3GPP Rel.15以降などともいう)も検討されている。 Successor systems to LTE (e.g., 5th generation mobile communication system (5G), 5G+ (plus), 6th generation mobile communication system (6G), New Radio (NR), 3GPP Rel. 15 or later, etc.) are also being considered.
将来の無線通信システム(例えば、NR)において、ユーザ端末(端末、user terminal、User Equipment(UE))は、疑似コロケーション(Quasi-Co-Location(QCL))に関する情報(QCL想定/Transmission Configuration Indication(TCI)状態/空間関係)に基づいて、送受信処理を制御することが検討されている。 In future wireless communication systems (e.g., NR), it is being considered that user terminals (UEs) will control transmission and reception processing based on information about quasi-co-location (QCL) (QCL assumptions/Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) state/spatial relationship).
Rel.17以降の無線通信システムでは統一TCI状態がサポートされ、Rel.18以降の無線通信システムでは複数の送受信ポイントに対する統一TCI状態(例えば、複数のTCI状態)が指示されることがサポートされることも想定される。 Wireless communication systems from Rel. 17 onwards will support a unified TCI state, and wireless communication systems from Rel. 18 onwards are expected to support the indication of a unified TCI state (e.g., multiple TCI states) for multiple transmitting and receiving points.
しかしながら、複数の指示TCI状態の指示/適用がサポートされる場合、各指示TCI状態の指示/更新をどのように制御するかについて十分に検討されていない。 However, when the indication/application of multiple indication TCI states is supported, there has been insufficient consideration given to how to control the indication/update of each indication TCI state.
そこで、本開示は、TCI状態の適用を適切に行う端末、無線通信方法及び基地局を提供することを目的の1つとする。 Therefore, one of the objectives of this disclosure is to provide a terminal, a wireless communication method, and a base station that appropriately apply the TCI state.
本開示の一態様に係る端末は、複数の指示Transmission Configuration Indication(TCI)状態を指示する下り制御情報及びMAC制御要素(MAC Control Element(MAC CE))の少なくとも一つを受信する受信部と、前記複数の指示TCI状態に基づいて下りリンク受信及び上りリンク送信の少なくとも一つを制御する制御部と、を有し、前記制御部は、複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを示す情報を受信した場合、前記サブセットを示す情報に基づいて、前記複数の指示TCI状態の一部の指示TCI状態を更新し、残りの指示TCI状態を維持する。 A terminal according to one aspect of the present disclosure has a receiving unit that receives at least one of downlink control information and MAC Control Elements (MAC CEs) that indicate multiple indicated Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) states, and a control unit that controls at least one of downlink reception and uplink transmission based on the multiple indicated TCI states. When the control unit receives information indicating a subset of the multiple indicated TCI states, the control unit updates the indicated TCI states of some of the multiple indicated TCI states based on the information indicating the subset, and maintains the remaining indicated TCI states.
本開示の一態様によれば、TCI状態の適用を適切に行うことができる。 According to one aspect of the present disclosure, TCI conditions can be applied appropriately.
(TCI、空間関係、QCL)
NRでは、送信設定指示状態(Transmission Configuration Indication state(TCI状態))に基づいて、信号及びチャネルの少なくとも一方(信号/チャネルと表現する)のUEにおける受信処理(例えば、受信、デマッピング、復調、復号の少なくとも1つ)、送信処理(例えば、送信、マッピング、プリコーディング、変調、符号化の少なくとも1つ)を制御することが検討されている。
(TCI, spatial relationships, QCL)
In NR, it is considered to control the reception processing (e.g., at least one of reception, demapping, demodulation, and decoding) and transmission processing (e.g., at least one of transmission, mapping, precoding, modulation, and encoding) in the UE of at least one of the signal and the channel (referred to as the signal/channel) based on the transmission configuration indication state (TCI state).
TCI状態は下りリンクの信号/チャネルに適用されるものを表してもよい。上りリンクの信号/チャネルに適用されるTCI状態に相当するものは、空間関係(spatial relation)と表現されてもよい。 TCI states may refer to those that apply to downlink signals/channels. The equivalent of TCI states that apply to uplink signals/channels may be expressed as spatial relations.
TCI状態とは、信号/チャネルの疑似コロケーション(Quasi-Co-Location(QCL))に関する情報であり、空間受信パラメータ、空間関係情報(Spatial Relation Information)などと呼ばれてもよい。TCI状態は、チャネルごと又は信号ごとにUEに設定されてもよい。 TCI status is information about the quasi-co-location (QCL) of signals/channels, and may also be called spatial reception parameters, spatial relation information, etc. The TCI status may be set in the UE for each channel or signal.
QCLとは、信号/チャネルの統計的性質を示す指標である。例えば、ある信号/チャネルと他の信号/チャネルがQCLの関係である場合、これらの異なる複数の信号/チャネル間において、ドップラーシフト(Doppler shift)、ドップラースプレッド(Doppler spread)、平均遅延(average delay)、遅延スプレッド(delay spread)、空間パラメータ(spatial parameter)(例えば、空間受信パラメータ(spatial Rx parameter))の少なくとも1つが同一である(これらの少なくとも1つに関してQCLである)と仮定できることを意味してもよい。 QCL is an index that indicates the statistical properties of a signal/channel. For example, if a signal/channel has a QCL relationship with another signal/channel, it may mean that it can be assumed that at least one of the Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, and spatial parameters (e.g., spatial Rx parameters) is the same between these different signals/channels (i.e., they have QCL with respect to at least one of these).
なお、空間受信パラメータは、UEの受信ビーム(例えば、受信アナログビーム)に対応してもよく、空間的QCLに基づいてビームが特定されてもよい。本開示におけるQCL(又はQCLの少なくとも1つの要素)は、sQCL(spatial QCL)で読み替えられてもよい。 Note that the spatial reception parameters may correspond to the reception beam of the UE (e.g., a reception analog beam), and the beam may be identified based on the spatial QCL. In this disclosure, the QCL (or at least one element of the QCL) may be interpreted as sQCL (spatial QCL).
QCLは、複数のタイプ(QCLタイプ)が規定されてもよい。例えば、同一であると仮定できるパラメータ(又はパラメータセット)が異なる4つのQCLタイプA-Dが設けられてもよい。 Multiple types of QCLs (QCL types) may be defined. For example, four QCL types A-D may be provided, each with different parameters (or parameter sets) that can be assumed to be identical.
ある制御リソースセット(Control Resource Set(CORESET))、チャネル又は参照信号が、別のCORESET、チャネル又は参照信号と特定のQCL(例えば、QCLタイプD)の関係にあるとUEが想定することは、QCL想定(QCL assumption)と呼ばれてもよい。 The UE's assumption that a Control Resource Set (CORESET), channel, or reference signal has a specific QCL (e.g., QCL type D) relationship with another CORESET, channel, or reference signal may be referred to as a QCL assumption.
UEは、信号/チャネルのTCI状態又はQCL想定に基づいて、当該信号/チャネルの送信ビーム(Txビーム)及び受信ビーム(Rxビーム)の少なくとも1つを決定してもよい。 The UE may determine at least one of the transmit beam (Tx beam) and receive beam (Rx beam) for a signal/channel based on the TCI condition or QCL assumption of the signal/channel.
TCI状態は、例えば、対象となるチャネル(言い換えると、当該チャネル用の参照信号(Reference Signal(RS)))と、別の信号(例えば、別のRS)とのQCLに関する情報であってもよい。TCI状態は、上位レイヤシグナリング、物理レイヤシグナリング又はこれらの組み合わせによって設定(指示)されてもよい。 The TCI state may be, for example, information regarding the QCL between the target channel (in other words, the reference signal (RS) for that channel) and another signal (e.g., another RS). The TCI state may be set (indicated) by higher layer signaling, physical layer signaling, or a combination of these.
物理レイヤシグナリングは、例えば、下り制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))であってもよい。 The physical layer signaling may be, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI).
TCI状態又は空間関係が設定(指定)されるチャネルは、例えば、下り共有チャネル(Physical Downlink Shared Channel(PDSCH))、下り制御チャネル(Physical Downlink Control Channel(PDCCH))、上り共有チャネル(Physical Uplink Shared Channel(PUSCH))、上り制御チャネル(Physical Uplink Control Channel(PUCCH))の少なくとも1つであってもよい。 The channel for which the TCI state or spatial relationship is set (specified) may be, for example, at least one of the following: a downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)), a downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)), an uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)), and an uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)).
また、当該チャネルとQCL関係となるRSは、例えば、同期信号ブロック(Synchronization Signal Block(SSB))、チャネル状態情報参照信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal(CSI-RS))、測定用参照信号(Sounding Reference Signal(SRS))、トラッキング用CSI-RS(Tracking Reference Signal(TRS)とも呼ぶ)、QCL検出用参照信号(QRSとも呼ぶ)の少なくとも1つであってもよい。 Furthermore, the RS that has a QCL relationship with the channel may be, for example, at least one of a synchronization signal block (SSB), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a sounding reference signal (SRS), a tracking CSI-RS (also called a tracking reference signal (TRS)), and a QCL detection reference signal (also called a QRS).
SSBは、プライマリ同期信号(Primary Synchronization Signal(PSS))、セカンダリ同期信号(Secondary Synchronization Signal(SSS))及びブロードキャストチャネル(Physical Broadcast Channel(PBCH))の少なくとも1つを含む信号ブロックである。SSBは、SS/PBCHブロックと呼ばれてもよい。 An SSB is a signal block that includes at least one of a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS), a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS), and a Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH). An SSB may also be referred to as an SS/PBCH block.
TCI状態のQCLタイプXのRSは、あるチャネル/信号(のDMRS)とQCLタイプXの関係にあるRSを意味してもよく、このRSは当該TCI状態のQCLタイプXのQCLソースと呼ばれてもよい。 An RS of QCL type X in a TCI state may refer to an RS that has a QCL type X relationship with a certain channel/signal (DMRS), and this RS may be called a QCL source of QCL type X in that TCI state.
〔データ用物理レイヤ手順/アンテナポートQCL〕
UEは、そのUEと、与えられたサービングセルと、を目的するDCIを伴う検出されたPDCCHに従って、PDSCHの復号のための上位レイヤパラメータPDSCH-Config内のM個までのTCI-State(TCI状態)設定のリストを設定されることができる。ここで、Mは、UE能力maxNumberConfiguredTCIstatesPerCCに依存する。
[Data Physical Layer Procedures/Antenna Port QCL]
A UE can configure a list of up to M TCI-State settings in the higher layer parameter PDSCH-Config for decoding of PDSCH according to a detected PDCCH with DCI intended for the UE and a given serving cell, where M depends on the UE capability maxNumberConfiguredTCIstatesPerCC.
各TCI-Stateは、1つ又は2つの下りリンク参照信号と、PDSCHのDMRSポート、PDCCHのDMRSポート、又はCSI-RSリソースのCSI-RSポートと、の間のQCL関係の設定のためのパラメータを含む。そのQCL関係は、第1DL RSに対する上位レイヤパラメータqcl-Type1と、(もし設定されれば)第2DL RSに対する上位レイヤパラメータqcl-Type2と、によって設定される。 Each TCI-State includes parameters for setting the QCL relationship between one or two downlink reference signals and the DMRS port of the PDSCH, the DMRS port of the PDCCH, or the CSI-RS port of the CSI-RS resource. The QCL relationship is set by the upper layer parameter qcl-Type1 for the first DL RS and the upper layer parameter qcl-Type2 for the second DL RS (if configured).
2つのDL RSのケースにおいて、参照が同じDL RSへの参照であるか異なるDL RSへの参照であるかに関わらず、複数QCLタイプは同じでない。各DL RSに対応するQCLタイプは、QCL-Info内の上位レイヤパラメータqcl-Typeによって与えられ、以下の値の1つを取る。
- 'typeA':{Doppler shift,Doppler spread,average delay,delay spread}
- 'typeB':{Doppler shift,Doppler spread}
- 'typeC':{Doppler shift,average delay}
- 'typeD':{Spatial Rx parameter}
In the case of two DL RSs, the multiple QCL types are not the same, regardless of whether the references are to the same DL RS or to different DL RSs. The QCL type corresponding to each DL RS is given by the upper layer parameter qcl-Type in QCL-Info and takes one of the following values:
- 'typeA': {Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread}
- 'typeB': {Doppler shift, Doppler spread}
- 'typeC': {Doppler shift, average delay}
- 'typeD': {Spatial Rx parameter}
〔RRCプロトコル仕様/RRC IE/TCI状態〕
TCI-State(TCI状態)は、1つ又は2つのDL参照信号(RS)を、対応するQCLタイプに関連付ける。もしそのRSに対して追加physical cell identifier(PCI)が設定される場合、両方のDL RSに対して同じ値が設定される。
[RRC Protocol Specifications/RRC IE/TCI Status]
A TCI-State associates one or two DL Reference Signals (RS) with a corresponding QCL type. If an additional physical cell identifier (PCI) is configured for that RS, it is set to the same value for both DL RSs.
(統一(unified)/共通(common)TCIフレームワーク)
統一TCIフレームワークによれば、複数種類(UL/DL)のチャネル/RSを共通のフレームワークによって制御できる。統一TCIフレームワークは、Rel.15のようにTCI状態又は空間関係をチャネルごとに規定するのではなく、共通ビーム(共通TCI状態)を指示し、それをUL及びDLの全てのチャネルへ適用してもよいし、UL用の共通ビームをULの全てのチャネルに適用し、DL用の共通ビームをDLの全てのチャネルに適用してもよい。
(Unified/Common TCI Framework)
The unified TCI framework allows multiple types of channels/RSs (UL/DL) to be controlled by a common framework. The unified TCI framework does not specify TCI states or spatial relationships for each channel as in Rel. 15, but instead specifies a common beam (common TCI state) and applies it to all UL and DL channels, or applies a common beam for UL to all UL channels and a common beam for DL to all DL channels.
DL及びULの両方のための1つの共通ビーム、又は、DL用の共通ビームとUL用の共通ビーム(全体で2つの共通ビーム)が検討されている。 One common beam for both DL and UL, or one common beam for DL and one common beam for UL (two common beams in total) are being considered.
UEは、UL及びDLに対して同じTCI状態(ジョイントTCI状態、ジョイントTCIプール、ジョイント共通TCIプール、ジョイントTCI状態セット)を想定してもよい。UEは、UL及びDLのそれぞれに対して異なるTCI状態(セパレートTCI状態、セパレートTCIプール、ULセパレートTCIプール及びDLセパレートTCIプール、セパレート共通TCIプール、UL共通TCIプール及びDL共通TCIプール)を想定してもよい。 The UE may assume the same TCI state for UL and DL (joint TCI state, joint TCI pool, joint common TCI pool, joint TCI state set). The UE may assume different TCI states for UL and DL (separate TCI state, separate TCI pool, UL separate TCI pool and DL separate TCI pool, separate common TCI pool, UL common TCI pool and DL common TCI pool).
MAC CEに基づくビーム管理(MAC CEレベルビーム指示)によって、UL及びDLのデフォルトビームを揃えてもよい。PDSCHのデフォルトTCI状態を更新し、デフォルトULビーム(空間関係)に合わせてもよい。 The UL and DL default beams may be aligned using MAC CE-based beam management (MAC CE level beam instructions). The PDSCH default TCI state may be updated to match the default UL beam (spatial relationship).
DCIに基づくビーム管理(DCIレベルビーム指示)によって、UL及びDLの両方用の同じTCIプール(ジョイント共通TCIプール、ジョイントTCIプール、セット)から共通ビーム/統一TCI状態が指示されてもよい。X(>1)個のTCI状態がMAC CEによってアクティベートされてもよい。UL/DL DCIは、X個のアクティブTCI状態から1つを選択してもよい。選択されたTCI状態は、UL及びDLの両方のチャネル/RSに適用されてもよい。 DCI-based beam management (DCI-level beam indication) may indicate a common beam/unified TCI state from the same TCI pool (joint common TCI pool, joint TCI pool, set) for both UL and DL. X (>1) TCI states may be activated by the MAC CE. The UL/DL DCI may select one from the X active TCI states. The selected TCI state may apply to both UL and DL channels/RS.
TCIプール(セット)は、RRCパラメータによって設定された複数のTCI状態であってもよいし、RRCパラメータによって設定された複数のTCI状態のうち、MAC CEによってアクティベートされた複数のTCI状態(アクティブTCI状態、アクティブTCIプール、セット)であってもよい。各TCI状態は、QCLタイプA/D RSであってもよい。QCLタイプA/D RSとしてSSB、CSI-RS、又はSRSが設定されてもよい。 The TCI pool (set) may be multiple TCI states configured by RRC parameters, or multiple TCI states (active TCI states, active TCI pool, set) activated by the MAC CE among multiple TCI states configured by RRC parameters. Each TCI state may be a QCL type A/D RS. SSB, CSI-RS, or SRS may be configured as the QCL type A/D RS.
1以上のTRPのそれぞれに対応するTCI状態の個数が規定されてもよい。例えば、ULのチャネル/RSに適用されるTCI状態(UL TCI状態)の個数N(≧1)と、DLのチャネル/RSに適用されるTCI状態(DL TCI状態)の個数M(≧1)と、が規定されてもよい。N及びMの少なくとも一方は、上位レイヤシグナリング/物理レイヤシグナリングを介して、UEに通知/設定/指示されてもよい。 The number of TCI states corresponding to each of one or more TRPs may be specified. For example, the number N (≧1) of TCI states (UL TCI states) applied to UL channels/RS and the number M (≧1) of TCI states (DL TCI states) applied to DL channels/RS may be specified. At least one of N and M may be notified/configured/instructed to the UE via higher layer signaling/physical layer signaling.
本開示において、N=M=X(Xは任意の整数)と記載される場合は、UEに対して、X個の(X個のTRPに対応する)UL及びDLに共通のTCI状態(ジョイントTCI状態)が通知/設定/指示されることを意味してもよい。また、N=X(Xは任意の整数)、M=Y(Yは任意の整数、Y=Xであってもよい)と記載される場合は、UEに対して、X個の(X個のTRPに対応する)UL TCI状態及びY個の(Y個のTRPに対応する)DL TCI状態(すなわち、セパレートTCI状態)がそれぞれ通知/設定/指示されることを意味してもよい。 In the present disclosure, when N=M=X (X is any integer), it may mean that X TCI states (joint TCI states) common to UL and DL (corresponding to X TRPs) are notified/configured/instructed to the UE. Also, when N=X (X is any integer) and M=Y (Y may be any integer, or Y=X), it may mean that X UL TCI states (corresponding to X TRPs) and Y DL TCI states (i.e., separate TCI states) (corresponding to Y TRPs) are notified/configured/instructed to the UE.
例えば、N=M=1と記載される場合は、UEに対し、単一のTRPに対する、1つのUL及びDLに共通のTCI状態が通知/設定/指示されることを意味してもよい(単一TRPのためのジョイントTCI状態)。 For example, when N=M=1 is written, this may mean that a TCI state common to one UL and DL for a single TRP is notified/configured/instructed to the UE (joint TCI state for a single TRP).
また、例えば、N=1、M=1と記載される場合は、UEに対し、単一のTRPに対する、1つのUL TCI状態と、1つのDL TCI状態と、が別々に通知/設定/指示されることを意味してもよい(単一TRPのためのセパレートTCI状態)。 Furthermore, for example, when N=1 and M=1 are written, this may mean that one UL TCI state and one DL TCI state for a single TRP are separately notified/configured/instructed to the UE (separate TCI states for a single TRP).
また、例えば、N=M=2と記載される場合は、UEに対し、複数の(2つの)TRPに対する、複数の(2つの)のUL及びDLに共通のTCI状態が通知/設定/指示されることを意味してもよい(複数TRPのためのジョイントTCI状態)。 Furthermore, for example, when N=M=2, this may mean that the UE is notified/configured/instructed to a TCI state common to multiple (two) ULs and DLs for multiple (two) TRPs (joint TCI state for multiple TRPs).
また、例えば、N=2、M=2と記載される場合は、UEに対し、複数(2つ)のTRPに対する、複数の(2つの)UL TCI状態と、複数の(2つの)DL TCI状態と、が通知/設定/指示されることを意味してもよい(複数TRPのためのセパレートTCI状態)。 Furthermore, for example, when N=2 and M=2 are written, this may mean that the UE is notified/configured/instructed to have multiple (two) UL TCI states and multiple (two) DL TCI states for multiple (two) TRPs (separate TCI states for multiple TRPs).
なお、上記例においては、N及びMの値が1又は2のケースを説明したが、N及びMの値は3以上であってもよいし、N及びMは異なってもよい。 In the above example, the values of N and M were described as 1 or 2, but the values of N and M may be 3 or greater, and N and M may be different.
Rel.17においてN=M=1がサポートされることが検討されている。Rel.18以降において他のケースがサポートされることが検討されている。 Support for N=M=1 is being considered for Rel. 17. Support for other cases is being considered for Rel. 18 and later.
図1Aの例において、RRCパラメータ(情報要素)は、DL及びULの両方用の複数のTCI状態を設定する。MAC CEは、設定された複数のTCI状態のうちの複数のTCI状態をアクティベートしてもよい。DCIは、アクティベートされた複数のTCI状態の1つを指示してもよい。DCIは、UL/DL DCIであってもよい。指示されたTCI状態は、UL/DLのチャネル/RSの少なくとも1つ(又は全て)に適用されてもよい。1つのDCIがUL TCI及びDL TCIの両方を指示してもよい。 In the example of Figure 1A, RRC parameters (information elements) configure multiple TCI states for both DL and UL. The MAC CE may activate multiple TCI states from the configured multiple TCI states. The DCI may indicate one of the activated multiple TCI states. The DCI may be a UL/DL DCI. The indicated TCI state may apply to at least one (or all) of the UL/DL channels/RS. One DCI may indicate both UL TCI and DL TCI.
この図の例において、1つの点は、UL及びDLの両方に適用される1つのTCI状態であってもよいし、UL及びDLにそれぞれ適用される2つのTCI状態であってもよい。 In the example shown in this figure, a single point may represent one TCI state that applies to both UL and DL, or two TCI states that apply to UL and DL, respectively.
RRCパラメータによって設定された複数のTCI状態と、MAC CEによってアクティベートされた複数のTCI状態と、の少なくとも1つは、TCIプール(共通TCIプール、ジョイントTCIプール、TCI状態プール)と呼ばれてもよい。MAC CEによってアクティベートされた複数のTCI状態は、アクティブTCIプール(アクティブ共通TCIプール)と呼ばれてもよい。 At least one of the multiple TCI states configured by the RRC parameters and the multiple TCI states activated by the MAC CE may be referred to as a TCI pool (common TCI pool, joint TCI pool, TCI state pool). The multiple TCI states activated by the MAC CE may be referred to as an active TCI pool (active common TCI pool).
なお、本開示において、複数のTCI状態を設定する上位レイヤパラメータ(RRCパラメータ)は、複数のTCI状態を設定する設定情報、単に「設定情報」と呼ばれてもよい。また、本開示において、DCIを用いて複数のTCI状態の1つを指示されることは、DCIに含まれる複数のTCI状態の1つを指示する指示情報を受信することであってもよいし、単に「指示情報」を受信することであってもよい。 Note that in the present disclosure, higher layer parameters (RRC parameters) that set multiple TCI states may be referred to as configuration information that sets multiple TCI states, or simply as "configuration information." Also, in the present disclosure, being instructed to set one of multiple TCI states using DCI may mean receiving instruction information that indicates one of the multiple TCI states included in the DCI, or simply receiving "instruction information."
図1Bの例において、RRCパラメータは、DL及びULの両方用の複数のTCI状態(ジョイント共通TCIプール)を設定する。MAC CEは、設定された複数のTCI状態のうちの複数のTCI状態(アクティブTCIプール)をアクティベートしてもよい。UL及びDLのそれぞれに対する(別々の、separate)アクティブTCIプールが、設定/アクティベートされてもよい。 In the example of Figure 1B, the RRC parameters configure multiple TCI states (joint common TCI pools) for both DL and UL. The MAC CE may activate multiple TCI states (active TCI pools) from the configured multiple TCI states. Separate active TCI pools may be configured/activated for each of the UL and DL.
DL DCI、又は新規DCIフォーマットが、1以上(例えば、1つ)のTCI状態を選択(指示)してもよい。その選択されたTCI状態は、1以上(又は全て)のDLのチャネル/RSに適用されてもよい。DLチャネルは、PDCCH/PDSCH/CSI-RSであってもよい。UEは、Rel.16のTCI状態の動作(TCIフレームワーク)を用いて、DLの各チャネル/RSのTCI状態を決定してもよい。UL DCI、又は新規DCIフォーマットが、1以上(例えば、1つ)のTCI状態を選択(指示)してもよい。その選択されたTCI状態は、1以上(又は全て)のULチャネル/RSに適用されてもよい。ULチャネルは、PUSCH/SRS/PUCCHであってもよい。このように、異なるDCIが、UL TCI及びDL DCIを別々に指示してもよい。 The DL DCI or a new DCI format may select (indicate) one or more (e.g., one) TCI states. The selected TCI state may apply to one or more (or all) DL channels/RSs. The DL channels may be PDCCH/PDSCH/CSI-RS. The UE may determine the TCI state for each DL channel/RS using the TCI state behavior (TCI framework) of Rel. 16. The UL DCI or a new DCI format may select (indicate) one or more (e.g., one) TCI states. The selected TCI state may apply to one or more (or all) UL channels/RSs. The UL channels may be PUSCH/SRS/PUCCH. In this way, different DCIs may indicate UL TCI and DL DCI separately.
Rel.17 NR以降では、MAC CE/DCIにより、異なるphysical cell identifier(PCI)に関連付けられたTCI状態へのビームのアクティベーション/指示がサポートされることが想定される。また、Rel.18 NR以降では、MAC CE/DCIにより、異なるPCIを有するセルへのサービングセルの変更が指示されることがサポートされることが想定される。 In Rel. 17 NR and later, it is assumed that MAC CE/DCI will support beam activation/indication to a TCI state associated with a different physical cell identifier (PCI). Also, in Rel. 18 NR and later, it is assumed that MAC CE/DCI will support indicative serving cell change to a cell with a different PCI.
〔データ用物理レイヤ手順/アンテナポートQCL〕
あるCC内のPDSCHのDMRS及びPDCCHのDMRSと、CSI-RSと、のための参照信号を提供するために、さらに、もし、あるCC内の動的グラント及び設定グラントベースのPUSCH及びPUCCHリソースと、SRSと、のためのUL TX(送信)空間フィルタが利用可能である場合、そのUL TCIフィルタの決定のための参照を提供するために、PDSCH-Config(PDSCH設定)内において、UEは、128個までのDLorJointTCIState(DL又はジョイントのTCI状態)設定のリストを設定されることができる。
[Data Physical Layer Procedures/Antenna Port QCL]
In order to provide reference signals for PDSCH DMRS and PDCCH DMRS and CSI-RS within a CC, and further to provide a reference for determining the UL TX (transmission) spatial filter for dynamic grant and configuration grant-based PUSCH and PUCCH resources and SRS within a CC, if such a filter is available, the UE can configure a list of up to 128 DLorJointTCIState settings within PDSCH-Config.
もしそのCC内のBWP内に、DLorJointTCIState又はUL-TCIState(UL TCI状態)の設定がない場合、そのUEは、参照CCの参照BWPからのDLorJointTCIState又はUL-TCIStateの設定を適用できる。もしそのUEが同じバンド内のいずれかのCC内においてDLorJointTCIState又はUL-TCIStateを設定された場合、そのバンド内のSpatialRelationInfoPos(位置用空間関係情報)を除く、TCI-State、SpatialRelationInfo(空間関係情報)、PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo(PUCCH空間関係情報)を設定されると想定しない。そのUEは、そのUEがsimultaneousTCI-UpdateList1-r16(同時TCI更新リスト1)、simultaneousTCI-UpdateList2-r16(同時TCI更新リスト2)、simultaneousSpatial-UpdatedList1-r16(同時空間更新リスト1)、又はsimultaneousSpatial-UpdatedList2-r16(同時空間更新リスト2)によってCCリスト内の任意のCC内のTCI-Stateを設定される場合に、そのUEが、そのCC内の任意のCC内のDLorJointTCIState又はUL-TCIStateを設定されない、と想定する。 If DLorJointTCIState or UL-TCIState (UL TCI state) is not configured in the BWP in that CC, the UE can apply the DLorJointTCIState or UL-TCIState configuration from the reference BWP of the reference CC. If the UE has DLorJointTCIState or UL-TCIState configured in any CC in the same band, it is not assumed that TCI-State, SpatialRelationInfo (spatial relation information), or PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo (PUCCH spatial relation information) in that band are configured, except for SpatialRelationInfoPos (spatial relation information for position). The UE assumes that if the UE has TCI-State set in any CC in the CC list by simultaneousTCI-UpdateList1-r16 (simultaneous TCI update list 1), simultaneousTCI-UpdateList2-r16 (simultaneous TCI update list 2), simultaneousSpatial-UpdatedList1-r16 (simultaneous spatial update list 1), or simultaneousSpatial-UpdatedList2-r16 (simultaneous spatial update list 2), the UE does not have DLorJointTCIState or UL-TCIState set in any CC in that CC.
そのUEは、もし利用可能であれば、CC/DL BWPの1つ、又は、CC/DL BWPのセットに対する、DCIフィールド'Transmission Configuration Indication'(TCI)のコードポイントへ、DLのチャネル/信号に対する1つのTCI状態と、ULのチャネル/信号に対する1つのTCI状態と、を伴う、8個までの、TCI状態及び/又はTCI状態のペアをマップすることに用いられるアクティベーションコマンドを受信する。CC/DL BWPのセットに対して、さらに、もし利用可能であればCC/DL BWPの1つに対して、TCI状態IDのセットがアクティベートされる場合、指示されたCC内の全てのDL及び/又はULのBWPに対して、TCI状態IDの同じセットが適用される。ここで、CCの適用可能リストは、そのアクティベーションコマンド内において指示されたCCによって決定される。もしそのアクティベーションコマンドが、DLorJointTCIState及び/又はUL-TCIStateを、1つのみのTCIコードポイントへマップする場合、そのUEは、その指示されたDLorJointTCIState及び/又はUL-TCIStateを、CC/DL BWPの1つ又はCC/DL BWPのセットへ適用し、もし1つの単一TCIコードポイントに対する指示されたマッピングが適用されると、その指示されたDLorJointTCIState及び/又はUL-TCIStateを、CC/DL BWPの1つ又はCC/DL BWPのセットへ適用する。 The UE receives an activation command used to map up to eight TCI states and/or TCI state pairs, with one TCI state for the DL channel/signal and one TCI state for the UL channel/signal, to code points in the DCI field 'Transmission Configuration Indication' (TCI) for one CC/DL BWP or set of CCs/DL BWPs, if available. When a set of TCI state IDs is activated for a set of CCs/DL BWPs, and, if available, for one of the CCs/DL BWPs, the same set of TCI state IDs applies to all DL and/or UL BWPs within the indicated CC, where the applicable list of CCs is determined by the CC indicated in the activation command. If the activation command maps DLorJointTCIState and/or UL-TCIState to only one TCI codepoint, the UE applies the indicated DLorJointTCIState and/or UL-TCIState to one or a set of CC/DL BWPs, and if the indicated mapping to one single TCI codepoint applies, the UE applies the indicated DLorJointTCIState and/or UL-TCIState to one or a set of CC/DL BWPs.
DLorJointTCIStateを設定されたTCI状態のQCL-Info内のQCLタイプA/DソースRSに対するbwp-id又はcellが設定されない場合、そのUEは、TCI状態が適用されるCC/DL BWP内に、そのQCLタイプA/DソースRSが設定される、と想定する。 If the bwp-id or cell for a QCL type A/D source RS in the QCL-Info of a TCI state with DLorJointTCIState set is not set, the UE assumes that the QCL type A/D source RS is set in the CC/DL BWP to which the TCI state applies.
(TCI状態の指示)
Rel.17統一TCIフレームワークは、以下のモード1から3をサポートする。
[モード1]MAC CEベースTCI状態指示(MAC CE based TCI state indication)
[モード2]DLアサインメントを伴うDCIベースTCI状態指示(DCI based TCI state indication by DCI format 1_1/1_2 with DL assignment)
[モード3]DLアサインメントを伴わないDCIベースTCI状態指示(DCI based TCI state indication by DCI format 1_1/1_2 without DL assignment)
(TCI Status Indication)
The Rel. 17 Unified TCI Framework supports the following modes 1 to 3:
[Mode 1] MAC CE based TCI state indication
[Mode 2] DCI based TCI state indication by DCI format 1_1/1_2 with DL assignment
[Mode 3] DCI based TCI state indication by DCI format 1_1/1_2 without DL assignment
Rel.17 TCI状態ID(例えば、tci-StateId_r17)を伴って設定されアクティベートされたTCI状態を伴うUEは、1つのCCに対し、Rel.17 TCI状態IDを伴う指示TCI状態(indicated TCI state)を提供するDCIフォーマット1_1/1_2を受信する、又は、同時TCI更新リスト1又は同時TCI更新リスト2(例えば、simultaneousTCI-UpdateList1 or simultaneousTCI-UpdateList2)によって設定されたCCリストと同じCCリスト内の全てのCCに対し、Rel.17 TCI状態IDを伴う指示TCI状態を提供するDCIフォーマット1_1/1_2を受信する。DCIフォーマット1_1/1_2は、もしDLアサインメントが利用可能であればそれを伴ってもよいし、伴わなくてもよい。 A UE with a configured and activated TCI state with a Rel. 17 TCI State ID (e.g., tci-StateId_r17) receives DCI format 1_1/1_2 providing an indicated TCI state with the Rel. 17 TCI State ID for one CC, or receives DCI format 1_1/1_2 providing an indicated TCI state with the Rel. 17 TCI State ID for all CCs in the same CC list as the CC list configured by simultaneous TCI update list 1 or simultaneous TCI update list 2 (e.g., simultaneousTCI-UpdateList1 or simultaneousTCI-UpdateList2). DCI format 1_1/1_2 may or may not be accompanied by a DL assignment if one is available.
もしDCIフォーマット1_1/1_2がDLアサインメントを伴わない場合、UEは、そのDCIに対して、以下を想定(検証)できる。
- CS-RNTIがDCIのためのCRCのスクランブルに用いられる。
- 以下のDCIフィールド(特別フィールド)の値が以下のようにセットされる:
- redundancy version(RV)フィールドがall '1's。
- modulation and coding scheme(MCS)フィールドがall '1's。
- new data indicator(NDI)フィールドが0。
- frequency domain resource assignment(FDRA)フィールドが、FDRAタイプ0に対してall '0's、又は、FDRAタイプ1に対してall '1's、又は、ダイナミックスイッチ(DynamicSwitch)に対してall '0's(DL semi-persistent scheduling(SPS)又はULグラントタイプ2スケジューリングのリリースのPDCCHの検証(validation)と同様)。
If DCI format 1_1/1_2 does not carry a DL assignment, the UE can assume (verify) the following for that DCI:
- The CS-RNTI is used to scramble the CRC for the DCI.
The values of the following DCI fields (special fields) are set as follows:
- The redundancy version (RV) field is all '1's.
- The modulation and coding scheme (MCS) field is all '1's.
- The new data indicator (NDI) field is 0.
- The frequency domain resource assignment (FDRA) field is all '0's for FDRA type 0 or all '1's for FDRA type 1 or all '0's for Dynamic Switch (similar to PDCCH validation for release of DL semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) or UL grant type 2 scheduling).
なお、上記モード2/モード3におけるDCIは、ビーム指示DCIと呼ばれてもよい。 Note that the DCI in Mode 2/Mode 3 above may also be referred to as beam instruction DCI.
Rel.15/16において、もしUEがDCIを介するアクティブBWP変更をサポートしない場合、UEは、BWPインディケータフィールドを無視する。Rel.17 TCI状態のサポートと、TCIフィールドの解釈と、の関係についても、同様の動作が検討されている。もしUEがRel.17 TCI状態を伴って設定された場合、DCIフォーマット1_1/1_2内にTCIフィールドが常に存在すること、もしUEがDCIを介するTCI更新をサポートしない場合、UEは、TCIフィールドを無視すること、が検討されている。 In Rel. 15/16, if the UE does not support active BWP changes via DCI, the UE ignores the BWP indicator field. Similar behavior is being considered for the relationship between Rel. 17 TCI state support and TCI field interpretation. If the UE is configured with Rel. 17 TCI state, the TCI field will always be present in DCI format 1_1/1_2; if the UE does not support TCI updates via DCI, the UE will ignore the TCI field.
Rel.15/16において、TCIフィールドが存在するか否か(DCI内TCI存在情報、tci-PresentInDCI)は、CORESETごとに設定される。 In Rel. 15/16, the presence or absence of a TCI field (TCI presence information in DCI, tci-PresentInDCI) is configured for each CORESET.
DCIフォーマット1_1におけるTCIフィールドは、上位レイヤパラメータtci-PresentInDCIが有効にされない場合に0ビットであり、そうでない場合に3ビットである。もしBWPインディケータフィールドが、アクティブBWP以外のBWPを指示する場合、UEは、以下の動作に従う。
[動作]もしそのDCIフォーマット1_1を伝達するPDCCHに用いられるCORESETに対して上位レイヤパラメータtci-PresentInDCIが有効にされない場合、UEは、指示されたBWP内の全てのCORESETに対してtci-PresentInDCIが有効にされないと想定し、そうでない場合、UEは、指示されたBWP内の全てのCORESETに対してtci-PresentInDCIが有効にされると想定する。
The TCI field in DCI format 1_1 is 0-bit if the higher layer parameter tci-PresentInDCI is not enabled, and 3-bit otherwise. If the BWP indicator field indicates a BWP other than the active BWP, the UE shall follow the following actions:
[Operation] If the higher layer parameter tci-PresentInDCI is not enabled for the CORESET used for the PDCCH carrying that DCI format 1_1, the UE shall assume that tci-PresentInDCI is not enabled for all CORESETs within the indicated BWP; otherwise, the UE shall assume that tci-PresentInDCI is enabled for all CORESETs within the indicated BWP.
DCIフォーマット1_2におけるTCIフィールドは、上位レイヤパラメータtci-PresentInDCI-1-2が設定されない場合に0ビットであり、そうでない場合に上位レイヤパラメータtci-PresentInDCI-1-2によって決定される1又は2又は3ビットである。もしBWPインディケータフィールドが、アクティブBWP以外のBWPを指示する場合、UEは、以下の動作に従う。
[動作]もしそのDCIフォーマット1_2を伝達するPDCCHに用いられるCORESETに対して上位レイヤパラメータtci-PresentInDCI-1-2が設定されない場合、UEは、指示されたBWP内の全てのCORESETに対してtci-PresentInDCIが有効にされないと想定し、そうでない場合、UEは、指示されたBWP内の全てのCORESETに対してtci-PresentInDCI-1-2が、そのDCIフォーマット1_2を伝達するPDCCHに用いられるCORESETに対して設定されたtci-PresentInDCI-1-2と同じ値を伴って設定されると想定する。
The TCI field in DCI format 1_2 is 0 bit if the higher layer parameter tci-PresentInDCI-1-2 is not set, otherwise it is 1, 2 or 3 bits determined by the higher layer parameter tci-PresentInDCI-1-2. If the BWP indicator field indicates a BWP other than the active BWP, the UE shall follow the following actions.
[Operation] If the higher layer parameter tci-PresentInDCI-1-2 is not set for the CORESET used for the PDCCH carrying that DCI format 1_2, the UE shall assume that tci-PresentInDCI is not enabled for all CORESETs in the indicated BWP; otherwise, the UE shall assume that tci-PresentInDCI-1-2 for all CORESETs in the indicated BWP is set with the same value as tci-PresentInDCI-1-2 set for the CORESET used for the PDCCH carrying that DCI format 1_2.
図2Aは、DCIベースのジョイントDL/UL TCI状態指示の一例を示す。ジョイントDL/UL TCI状態指示用のTCIフィールドの値に対し、ジョイントDL/UL TCI状態を示すTCI状態IDが関連付けられている。 Figure 2A shows an example of a DCI-based joint DL/UL TCI status indication. A TCI status ID indicating the joint DL/UL TCI status is associated with the value of the TCI field for the joint DL/UL TCI status indication.
図2Bは、DCIベースのセパレートDL/UL TCI状態指示の一例を示す。セパレートDL/UL TCI状態指示用のTCIフィールドの値に対し、DLのみのTCI状態を示すTCI状態IDと、ULのみのTCI状態を示すTCI状態IDと、の少なくとも1つのTCI状態IDが関連付けられている。この例において、TCIフィールドの値000から001は、DL用の1つのTCI状態IDのみに関連付けられ、TCIフィールドの値010から011は、UL用の1つのTCI状態IDのみに関連付けられ、TCIフィールドの値100から111は、DL用の1つのTCI状態IDと、UL用の1つのTCI状態IDとの両方に関連付けられている。 Figure 2B shows an example of a DCI-based separate DL/UL TCI status indication. At least one TCI status ID is associated with the value of the TCI field for the separate DL/UL TCI status indication: a TCI status ID indicating a DL-only TCI status and a TCI status ID indicating a UL-only TCI status. In this example, TCI field values 000 to 001 are associated with only one TCI status ID for DL, TCI field values 010 to 011 are associated with only one TCI status ID for UL, and TCI field values 100 to 111 are associated with both one TCI status ID for DL and one TCI status ID for UL.
(指示TCI状態/設定TCI状態)
Rel.17TCI状態について、統一/共通TCI状態は、(Rel.17の)DCI/MAC CE/RRCを用いて指示されるRel.17TCI状態(指示Rel.17TCI状態(indicated Rel.17 TCI state))を意味してもよい。
(Indicated TCI state/Set TCI state)
For Rel. 17 TCI states, the unified/common TCI state may refer to the Rel. 17 TCI state indicated using (Rel. 17) DCI/MAC CE/RRC (indicated Rel. 17 TCI state).
本開示において、指示Rel.17TCI状態、指示TCI状態(indicated TCI state)、統一/共通TCI状態、複数種類の信号(チャネル/RS)に適用されるTCI状態、複数種類の信号(チャネル/RS)のためのTCI状態、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, the terms indicated Rel. 17 TCI state, indicated TCI state, unified/common TCI state, TCI state applicable to multiple types of signals (channels/RS), and TCI state for multiple types of signals (channels/RS) may be interpreted interchangeably.
指示Rel.17TCI状態は、(Rel.17のDCI/MAC CE/RRCを用いて更新された、)PDSCH/PDCCにおけるUE固有の受信、動的グラント(DCI)/設定(configured)グラントのPUSCH、及び、複数の(例えば、全ての)固有(dedicated)PUCCHリソース、の少なくとも1つと共有されてもよい。DCI/MAC CE/RRCにより指示されるTCI状態は、指示TCI状態、統一TCI状態と呼ばれてもよい。 The indicated Rel. 17 TCI state may be shared with at least one of the UE-specific reception of PDSCH/PDCC (updated using Rel. 17 DCI/MAC CE/RRC), PUSCH of dynamic grant (DCI)/configured grant, and multiple (e.g., all) dedicated PUCCH resources. The TCI state indicated by DCI/MAC CE/RRC may be referred to as the indicated TCI state or the unified TCI state.
Rel.17TCI状態について、統一TCI状態以外のTCI状態は、(Rel.17の)MAC CE/RRCを用いて設定されるRel.17TCI状態(設定Rel.17TCI状態(configured Rel.17 TCI state))を意味してもよい。本開示において、設定Rel.17TCI状態、設定TCI状態(configured TCI state)、統一TCI状態以外のTCI状態、特定種類の信号(チャネル/RS)に適用されるTCI状態、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。 With regard to the Rel. 17 TCI state, a TCI state other than the unified TCI state may refer to a Rel. 17 TCI state configured using (Rel. 17) MAC CE/RRC (configured Rel. 17 TCI state). In this disclosure, the terms configured Rel. 17 TCI state, configured TCI state, a TCI state other than the unified TCI state, and a TCI state applied to a specific type of signal (channel/RS) may be interpreted interchangeably.
設定Rel.17TCI状態は、(Rel.17のDCI/MAC CE/RRCを用いて更新された、)PDSCH/PDCCにおけるUE固有の受信、動的グラント(DCI)/設定(configured)グラントのPUSCH、及び、複数の(例えば、全ての)固有(dedicated)PUCCHリソース、の少なくとも1つと共有されなくてもよい。設定Rel.17TCI状態は、CORESETごと/リソースごと/リソースセットごとにRRC/MAC CEで設定され、上述した指示Rel.17TCI状態(コモンTCI状態)が更新されても、設定Rel.17TCI状態は更新されない構成であってもよい。 The configured Rel. 17 TCI state may not be shared with at least one of the UE-specific reception on the PDSCH/PDCC (updated using Rel. 17 DCI/MAC CE/RRC), the PUSCH of the dynamic grant (DCI)/configured grant, and multiple (e.g., all) dedicated PUCCH resources. The configured Rel. 17 TCI state may be configured by RRC/MAC CE per CORESET/per resource/per resource set, and may not be updated even if the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state (common TCI state) is updated.
UE固有のチャネル/信号(RS)に対して、指示Rel.17TCI状態が適用されることが検討されている。また、非UE固有のチャネル/信号に対して、指示Rel.17TCI状態及び設定Rel.17TCI状態のいずれかを適用するかについて上位レイヤシグナリング(RRCシグナリング)を用いてUEに通知することが検討されている。 It is being considered that the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state will be applied to UE-specific channels/signals (RS). It is also being considered that the UE will be notified using higher layer signaling (RRC signaling) as to whether the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state or the configured Rel. 17 TCI state will be applied to non-UE-specific channels/signals.
設定Rel.17TCI状態(TCI状態ID)に関するRRCパラメータは、Rel.15/16におけるTCI状態のRRCパラメータと同じ構成とすることが検討されている。設定Rel.17TCI状態は、RRC/MAC CEを用いて、CORESETごと/リソースごと/リソースセットごとに設定/指示されることが検討されている。また、当該設定/指示について、UEは、特定のパラメータに基づいて判断することが検討されている。 It is being considered that the RRC parameters for the configured Rel. 17 TCI state (TCI state ID) will have the same configuration as the RRC parameters for the TCI state in Rel. 15/16. It is being considered that the configured Rel. 17 TCI state will be configured/instructed per CORESET/per resource/per resource set using RRC/MAC CE. It is also being considered that the UE will make decisions regarding this configuration/instruction based on specific parameters.
UEに対し、指示TCI状態の更新と、設定TCI状態の更新と、が別々に行われることが検討されている。例えば、UEに対し、指示TCI状態についての統一TCI状態が更新された場合、設定TCI状態の更新が行われなくてもよい。また、当該更新について、UEは、特定のパラメータに基づいて判断することが検討されている。 It is being considered that the UE will update the indicated TCI state and the configured TCI state separately. For example, if the unified TCI state for the indicated TCI state is updated for the UE, the configured TCI state may not need to be updated. It is also being considered that the UE will make a decision about this update based on specific parameters.
また、PDCCH/PDSCHについて、指示Rel.17TCI状態が適用されるか、指示Rel.17TCI状態が適用されない(設定Rel.17TCI状態が適用される、指示Rel.17TCI状態とは別に設定されたTCI状態が適用される)か、について、上位レイヤシグナリング(RRC/MAC CE)を用いて切り替えることが検討されている。 In addition, it is being considered to use higher layer signaling (RRC/MAC CE) to switch between whether the Rel. 17 TCI state indicated by the PDCCH/PDSCH is applied or not (the Rel. 17 TCI state configured by the Rel. 17 TCI state is applied, or a TCI state configured separately from the Rel. 17 TCI state is applied).
また、セル内(intra-cell)のビーム指示(TCI状態の指示)について、UE固有のCORESET及び当該CORESETに関連するPDSCHと、非UE固有のCORESET及び当該CORESETに関連するPDSCHと、に対して指示Rel.17TCI状態がサポートされることが検討されている。 In addition, with regard to intra-cell beam indication (TCI state indication), it is being considered to support Rel. 17 TCI state indication for UE-specific CORESETs and the PDSCHs associated with those CORESETs, as well as non-UE-specific CORESETs and the PDSCHs associated with those CORESETs.
また、セル間(inter-cell)のビーム指示(例えば、L1/L2インターセルモビリティ)について、UE固有のCORESET及び当該CORESETに関連するPDSCHに対して、指示Rel.17TCI状態がサポートされることが検討されている。 In addition, for inter-cell beam indication (e.g., L1/L2 inter-cell mobility), support for indicating Rel. 17 TCI states for UE-specific CORESETs and the PDSCHs associated with those CORESETs is under consideration.
Rel.15において、CORESET#0に対しTCI状態を指示するかどうかは基地局の実装次第であった。Rel.15では、TCI状態を指示されたCORESET#0について、当該指示されたTCI状態が適用される。TCI状態が指示されないCORESET#0に対して、最新(最近)のPRACH送信時に選択したSSBとQCLが適用される。 In Rel. 15, whether or not to instruct the TCI state for CORESET #0 was up to the base station's implementation. In Rel. 15, for CORESET #0 for which a TCI state is instructed, the instructed TCI state is applied. For CORESET #0 for which a TCI state is not instructed, the SSB and QCL selected at the time of the most recent PRACH transmission are applied.
Rel.17以降の統一TCI状態フレームワークにおいて、CORESET#0に関するTCI状態について検討がされている。 In the unified TCI status framework for Rel. 17 and later, the TCI status for CORESET #0 is being considered.
例えば、Rel.17以降の統一TCI状態のフレームワークでは、CORESET#0のRel.17 TCI状態指示について、サービングセルに関連づけられた指示Rel.17TCI状態(indicated Rel-17 TCI state associated with the serving cell)を適用するかどうかは、RRCによりCORESETごとに設定され、適用しない場合には、既存のMAC CE/RACHシグナリングメカニズム(legacy MAC CE/RACH signalling mechanism)が利用されてもよい。 For example, in the unified TCI state framework for Rel. 17 and later, whether or not to apply the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state associated with the serving cell for the Rel. 17 TCI state indication in CORESET #0 is configured by RRC for each CORESET. If not, the legacy MAC CE/RACH signaling mechanism may be used.
なお、CORESET#0に適用されるRel.17TCI状態に関連するCSI-RSは、サービングセルPCI(物理セルID)に関連するSSBとQCLされてもよい(Rel.15と同様)。 Note that the CSI-RS associated with the Rel. 17 TCI state applied to CORESET #0 may be QCL'd with the SSB associated with the serving cell PCI (physical cell ID) (similar to Rel. 15).
CORESET#0、共通サーチスペース(common search space(CSS))を伴うCORESET、CSSとUE固有サーチスペース(UE-specific search space(USS))を伴うCORESET、に対し、CORESETごとに、指示Rel.17TCI状態に従うか否かがRRCパラメータによって設定されてもよい。そのCORESETに対し、指示Rel.17TCI状態に従うことを設定されない場合、設定Rel.17TCI状態が、そのCORESETに適用されてもよい。 For CORESET #0, a CORESET with a common search space (CSS), and a CORESET with a CSS and a UE-specific search space (USS), whether to follow the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state may be configured for each CORESET by an RRC parameter. If the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state is not configured for that CORESET, the configured Rel. 17 TCI state may apply to that CORESET.
(CORESETを除く)非UE個別(non-UE-dedicated)のチャネル/RSに対し、チャネル/リソース/リソースセットごとに、指示Rel.17TCI状態に従うか否かがRRCパラメータによって設定されてもよい。そのチャネル/リソース/リソースセットに対し、指示Rel.17TCI状態に従うことを設定されない場合、設定Rel.17TCI状態が、そのチャネル/リソース/リソースセットに適用されてもよい。 For non-UE-dedicated channels/RSs (excluding CORESET), whether to follow the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state may be configured by an RRC parameter for each channel/resource/resource set. If the indicated Rel. 17 TCI state is not configured for that channel/resource/resource set, the configured Rel. 17 TCI state may apply to that channel/resource/resource set.
(指示TCI状態が適用されるチャネル/RS)
MAC CE/DCIによる指示TCI状態("indicated TCI state")は、以下のチャネル/RSに適用されてもよい。
(Channel/RS to which the indicated TCI state applies)
The indicated TCI state by the MAC CE/DCI may apply to the following channels/RS:
[PDCCH]
・CORESET0に対し、followUnifiedTCIState(統一TCI状態に従うこと)が設定された場合、指示TCI状態が適用される。そうでない場合、そのCORESETに対し、Rel.15仕様が適用される。すなわち、CORESET0は、MAC CEによってアクティベートされたTCI状態に従う、又は、SSBとQCLされる。
・USS/CSSタイプ3を伴う、インデックス0以外のCORESETに対し、常に指示TCI状態が適用される。
・少なくともCSSタイプ3以外のCSSを伴う、インデックス0以外のCORESETに対し、統一TCI状態に従うことが設定された場合、指示TCI状態が適用される。そうでない場合、そのCORESETに対する設定TCI状態("configured TCI state")が、そのCORESETに適用される。
[PDCCH]
If followUnifiedTCIState is set for CORESET0, the indicated TCI state applies. Otherwise, the Rel. 15 specifications apply for that CORESET. That is, CORESET0 follows the TCI state activated by the MAC CE or is QCL'd with SSB.
For CORESETs with index other than 0 with USS/CSS type 3, the indicated TCI state always applies.
For a CORESET with an index other than 0, with at least a CSS other than CSS type 3, configured to follow the unified TCI state, the indicated TCI state applies. Otherwise, the configured TCI state for that CORESET applies to that CORESET.
[PDSCH]
・全てのUE個別(UE-dedicated)PDSCHに対し、常に指示TCI状態が適用される。
・非UE個別(non-UE-dedicated)PDSCH(CSS内のDCIによってスケジュールされたPDSCH)に対し、(そのPDSCHをスケジュールするPDCCHのCORESETに対して)followUnifiedTCIStateが設定された場合、指示TCI状態が適用されてもよい。そうでない場合、そのPDSCHに対する設定TCI状態が、そのPDSCHに適用される。PDSCHに対し、followUnifiedTCIStateが設定されない場合、非UE個別PDSCHが指示TCI状態に従うかどうかが、そのPDSCHのスケジューリングに用いられたCORESETに対し、followUnifiedTCIStateが設定されたか否かに応じて決定されてもよい。
[PDSCH]
- The indication TCI state always applies for all UE-dedicated PDSCHs.
For a non-UE-dedicated PDSCH (a PDSCH scheduled by a DCI in the CSS), if followUnifiedTCIState is set (for the CORESET of the PDCCH that schedules that PDSCH), the indicated TCI state may apply. Otherwise, the configured TCI state for that PDSCH applies to that PDSCH. If followUnifiedTCIState is not set for a PDSCH, whether a non-UE-dedicated PDSCH follows the indicated TCI state may depend on whether followUnifiedTCIState is set for the CORESET used to schedule that PDSCH.
[CSI-RS]
・CSI取得(acquisition)又はビーム管理(management)のためのA-CSI-RSに対し、(そのA-CSI-RSをトリガするPDCCHのCORESETに対して)followUnifiedTCIStateが設定された場合、指示TCI状態が適用される。その他のCSI-RSに対し、そのCSI-RSに対する設定TCI状態("configured TCI state")が適用される。
[CSI-RS]
For an A-CSI-RS for CSI acquisition or beam management, if followUnifiedTCIState is set (for CORESET of the PDCCH that triggers that A-CSI-RS), the indicated TCI state applies. For other CSI-RSs, the configured TCI state for that CSI-RS applies.
[PUCCH]
・全ての個別(dedicated)PUCCHリソースに対し、常に指示TCI状態が適用される。
[PUCCH]
- For all dedicated PUCCH resources, the indicated TCI state always applies.
[PUSCH]
・動的(dynamic)/設定(configured)グラントPUSCHに対し、常に指示TCI状態が適用される。
[PUSH]
For dynamic/configured grant PUSCH, the indication TCI state is always applied.
[SRS]
・ビーム管理の用途のA-SRSと、コードブック(CB)/ノンコードブック(NCB)/アンテナスイッチングの用途のA/SP/P-SRSのための、SRSリソースセットに対し、統一TCI状態に従うことが設定された場合、指示TCI状態が適用される。その他のSRSに対し、そのSRSリソースセット内の設定TCI状態が適用される。
[SRS]
If the SRS resource set for the A-SRS used for beam management and the A/SP/P-SRS used for codebook (CB)/non-codebook (NCB)/antenna switching is configured to follow the unified TCI state, the indicated TCI state applies. For other SRSs, the configured TCI state within the SRS resource set applies.
(マルチTRP)
NRでは、1つ又は複数の送受信ポイント(Transmission/Reception Point(TRP))(マルチTRP)が、1つ又は複数のパネル(マルチパネル)を用いて、UEに対してDL送信を行うことが検討されている。また、UEが、1つ又は複数のTRPに対してUL送信を行うことが検討されている。
(Multi-TRP)
In NR, one or more transmission/reception points (Transmission/Reception Points (TRPs)) (multi-TRPs) are considered to perform DL transmission to a UE using one or more panels (multi-panels). Also, it is considered that a UE performs UL transmission to one or more TRPs.
なお、複数のTRPは、同じセル識別子(セルIdentifier(ID))に対応してもよいし、異なるセルIDに対応してもよい。当該セルIDは、物理セルID(例えば、PCI)でもよいし、仮想セルIDでもよい。 Note that multiple TRPs may correspond to the same cell identifier (ID), or to different cell IDs. The cell ID may be a physical cell ID (e.g., PCI) or a virtual cell ID.
図3A-図3Dは、マルチTRPシナリオの一例を示す図である。これらの例において、各TRPは4つの異なるビームを送信可能であると想定するが、これに限られない。 Figures 3A-3D show examples of multi-TRP scenarios. In these examples, it is assumed that each TRP can transmit four different beams, but this is not limited to this example.
図3Aは、マルチTRPのうち1つのTRP(本例ではTRP1)のみがUEに対して送信を行うケース(シングルモード、シングルTRPなどと呼ばれてもよい)の一例を示す。この場合、TRP1は、UEに制御信号(PDCCH)及びデータ信号(PDSCH)の両方を送信する。 Figure 3A shows an example of a case where only one TRP (TRP1 in this example) of multiple TRPs transmits to the UE (this may be referred to as single mode, single TRP, etc.). In this case, TRP1 transmits both control signals (PDCCH) and data signals (PDSCH) to the UE.
本開示において、シングルTRPモードは、マルチTRP(モード)が設定されない場合のモードを意味してもよい。 In this disclosure, single-TRP mode may refer to the mode when multi-TRP (mode) is not set.
図3Bは、マルチTRPのうち1つのTRP(本例ではTRP1)のみがUEに対して制御信号を送信し、当該マルチTRPがデータ信号を送信するケース(シングルマスタモードと呼ばれてもよい)の一例を示す。UEは、1つの下り制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))に基づいて、当該マルチTRPから送信される各PDSCHを受信する。 Figure 3B shows an example of a case where only one TRP (TRP1 in this example) of the multi-TRPs transmits a control signal to the UE, and the multi-TRP transmits a data signal (this may be called single master mode). The UE receives each PDSCH transmitted from the multi-TRP based on a single piece of downlink control information (Downlink Control Information (DCI)).
図3Cは、マルチTRPのそれぞれがUEに対して制御信号の一部を送信し、当該マルチTRPがデータ信号を送信するケース(マスタスレーブモードと呼ばれてもよい)の一例を示す。TRP1では制御信号(DCI)のパート1が送信され、TRP2では制御信号(DCI)のパート2が送信されてもよい。制御信号のパート2はパート1に依存してもよい。UEは、これらのDCIのパートに基づいて、当該マルチTRPから送信される各PDSCHを受信する。 Figure 3C shows an example of a case where each of the multi-TRPs transmits a part of the control signal to the UE, and the multi-TRP transmits a data signal (this may be called master-slave mode). Part 1 of the control signal (DCI) may be transmitted on TRP1, and part 2 of the control signal (DCI) may be transmitted on TRP2. Part 2 of the control signal may depend on part 1. The UE receives each PDSCH transmitted from the multi-TRP based on these parts of the DCI.
図3Dは、マルチTRPのそれぞれがUEに対して別々の制御信号を送信し、当該マルチTRPがデータ信号を送信するケース(マルチマスタモードと呼ばれてもよい)の一例を示す。TRP1では第1の制御信号(DCI)が送信され、TRP2では第2の制御信号(DCI)が送信されてもよい。UEは、これらのDCIに基づいて、当該マルチTRPから送信される各PDSCHを受信する。 Figure 3D shows an example of a case where each of the multi-TRPs transmits a separate control signal to the UE, and the multi-TRPs transmit data signals (this may be called multi-master mode). A first control signal (DCI) may be transmitted from TRP1, and a second control signal (DCI) may be transmitted from TRP2. The UE receives each PDSCH transmitted from the multi-TRP based on these DCIs.
図3BのようなマルチTRPからの複数のPDSCH(マルチPDSCH(multiple PDSCH)と呼ばれてもよい)を、1つのDCIを用いてスケジュールする場合、当該DCIは、シングルDCI(S-DCI、シングルPDCCH)と呼ばれてもよい。また、図4DのようなマルチTRPからの複数のPDSCHを、複数のDCIを用いてそれぞれスケジュールする場合、これらの複数のDCIは、マルチDCI(M-DCI、マルチPDCCH(multiple PDCCH))と呼ばれてもよい。 When multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs such as those shown in Figure 3B (which may also be called multiple PDSCHs) are scheduled using a single DCI, the DCI may be called a single DCI (S-DCI, single PDCCH). Also, when multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs such as those shown in Figure 4D are scheduled using multiple DCIs, these multiple DCIs may be called multiple DCIs (M-DCI, multiple PDCCHs).
マルチTRPの各TRPからは、それぞれ異なるトランスポートブロック(Transport Block(TB))/コードワード(Code Word(CW))/異なるレイヤが送信されてもよい。あるいは、マルチTRPの各TRPからは、同一のTB/CW/レイヤが送信されてもよい。 Each TRP in a multi-TRP may transmit a different transport block (TB)/code word (CW)/layer. Alternatively, each TRP in a multi-TRP may transmit the same TB/CW/layer.
マルチTRP送信の一形態として、ノンコヒーレントジョイント送信(Non-Coherent Joint Transmission(NCJT))が検討されている。NCJTにおいて、例えば、TRP1は、第1のコードワードを変調マッピングし、レイヤマッピングして第1の数のレイヤ(例えば2レイヤ)を第1のプリコーディングを用いて第1のPDSCHを送信する。また、TRP2は、第2のコードワードを変調マッピングし、レイヤマッピングして第2の数のレイヤ(例えば2レイヤ)を第2のプリコーディングを用いて第2のPDSCHを送信する。 Non-Coherent Joint Transmission (NCJT) is being considered as one form of multi-TRP transmission. In NCJT, for example, TRP1 modulates and layer maps a first codeword to transmit a first PDSCH using a first number of layers (e.g., two layers) with a first precoding. Furthermore, TRP2 modulates and layer maps a second codeword to transmit a second PDSCH using a second number of layers (e.g., two layers) with a second precoding.
なお、NCJTされる複数のPDSCH(マルチPDSCH)は、時間及び周波数ドメインの少なくとも一方に関して部分的に又は完全に重複すると定義されてもよい。つまり、第1のTRPからの第1のPDSCHと、第2のTRPからの第2のPDSCHと、は時間及び周波数リソースの少なくとも一方が重複してもよい。 Note that multiple PDSCHs (multi-PDSCHs) that are NCJTed may be defined as partially or completely overlapping in at least one of the time and frequency domains. In other words, the first PDSCH from the first TRP and the second PDSCH from the second TRP may overlap in at least one of the time and frequency resources.
これらの第1のPDSCH及び第2のPDSCHは、疑似コロケーション(Quasi-Co-Location(QCL))関係にない(not quasi-co-located)と想定されてもよい。マルチPDSCHの受信は、あるQCLタイプ(例えば、QCLタイプD)でないPDSCHの同時受信で読み替えられてもよい。 The first PDSCH and second PDSCH may be assumed to be not quasi-co-located (QCL). Reception of multiple PDSCHs may be interpreted as simultaneous reception of PDSCHs that are not of a certain QCL type (e.g., QCL type D).
マルチTRPに対するURLLCにおいて、マルチTRPにまたがるPDSCH(トランスポートブロック(TB)又はコードワード(CW))繰り返し(repetition)がサポートされることが検討されている。周波数ドメイン又はレイヤ(空間)ドメイン又は時間ドメイン上でマルチTRPにまたがる繰り返し方式(URLLCスキーム、例えば、スキーム1、2a、2b、3、4)がサポートされることが検討されている。スキーム1において、マルチTRPからのマルチPDSCHは、空間分割多重(space division multiplexing(SDM))される。スキーム2a、2bにおいて、マルチTRPからのPDSCHは、周波数分割多重(frequency division multiplexing(FDM))される。スキーム2aにおいては、マルチTRPに対して冗長バージョン(redundancy version(RV))は同じである。スキーム2bにおいては、マルチTRPに対してRVは同じであってもよいし、異なってもよい。スキーム3、4において、マルチTRPからのマルチPDSCHは、時間分割多重(time division multiplexing(TDM))される。スキーム3において、マルチTRPからのマルチPDSCHは、1つのスロット内で送信される。スキーム4において、マルチTRPからのマルチPDSCHは、異なるスロット内で送信される。 In URLLC for multi-TRP, it is considered that PDSCH (transport block (TB) or codeword (CW)) repetition across multi-TRP will be supported. It is considered that repetition schemes (URLLC schemes, for example, schemes 1, 2a, 2b, 3, and 4) across multi-TRP in the frequency domain, layer (spatial) domain, or time domain will be supported. In scheme 1, multi-PDSCH from multi-TRP is space division multiplexed (SDM). In schemes 2a and 2b, PDSCH from multi-TRP is frequency division multiplexed (FDM). In scheme 2a, the redundancy version (RV) is the same for multi-TRP. In scheme 2b, the RV may be the same or different for multi-TRP. In schemes 3 and 4, multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs are time division multiplexed (TDM). In scheme 3, multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs are transmitted within one slot. In scheme 4, multiple PDSCHs from multiple TRPs are transmitted within different slots.
このようなマルチTRPシナリオによれば、品質の良いチャネルを用いたより柔軟な送信制御が可能である。 Such a multi-TRP scenario allows for more flexible transmission control using high-quality channels.
マルチTRP/パネルを用いるNCJTは、高ランクを用いる可能性がある。複数TRPの間の理想的(ideal)及び非理想的(non-ideal)のバックホール(backhaul)をサポートするために、シングルDCI(シングルPDCCH、例えば、図3B)及びマルチDCI(マルチPDCCH、例えば、図3D)の両方がサポートされてもよい。シングルDCI及びマルチDCIの両方に対し、TRPの最大数が2であってもよい。 NCJT using multiple TRPs/panels may use a high rank. To support ideal and non-ideal backhaul between multiple TRPs, both single DCI (single PDCCH, e.g., Figure 3B) and multiple DCI (multiple PDCCH, e.g., Figure 3D) may be supported. For both single DCI and multi-DCI, the maximum number of TRPs may be 2.
シングルPDCCH設計(主に理想バックホール用)に対し、TCIの拡張が検討されている。DCI内の各TCIコードポイントは1又は2のTCI状態に対応してもよい。TCIフィールドサイズはRel.15のものと同じであってもよい。 For single PDCCH designs (mainly for ideal backhaul), TCI extensions are being considered. Each TCI code point in the DCI may correspond to one or two TCI states. The TCI field size may be the same as that in Rel. 15.
Rel.15で規定されるPDCCH/CORESETについて、CORESETプールインデックス(CORESETPoolIndex)(TRP情報(TRP Info)と呼ばれてもよい)なしの1つのTCI状態が、1つのCORESETに設定される。 For PDCCH/CORESET as specified in Rel. 15, one TCI state without CORESETPoolIndex (also referred to as TRP Info) is set to one CORESET.
Rel.16で規定されるPDCCH/CORESETのエンハンスメントについて、マルチDCIに基づくマルチTRPでは、各CORESETに対して、CORESETプールインデックスが設定される。 With regard to the PDCCH/CORESET enhancements specified in Rel. 16, in multi-TRP based on multi-DCI, a CORESET pool index is configured for each CORESET.
(TCI選択フィールド)
DLチャネル/信号のスケジュール/アクティベート/トリガ用のDCIフォーマット(例えば、DCIフォーマット1_1/1-2(DL DCIと呼ばれてもよい))に、特定のフィールド(新規DCIフィールド)が含まれてもよい。
(TCI Selection Field)
A specific field (new DCI field) may be included in a DCI format (eg, DCI format 1_1/1-2 (which may be referred to as DL DCI)) for scheduling/activating/triggering DL channels/signals.
当該特定のフィールドは、スケジュール/アクティベート/トリガされるDLチャネル/信号に、1つ又は複数(例えば、両方/2つ)の指示(indicated)TCI状態(ジョイント/DL TCI状態)を適用することを指示するフィールドであってもよい。言い換えれば、当該特定のフィールドは、適用する指示TCI状態の数/順番を示すフィールドであってもよい。 The specific field may be a field that indicates that one or more (e.g., both/two) indicated TCI states (joint/DL TCI states) should be applied to the DL channel/signal being scheduled/activated/triggered. In other words, the specific field may be a field that indicates the number/order of the indicated TCI states to be applied.
当該特定のフィールドは、特定のビット数(例えば、2ビット)で表されてもよい。 The particular field may be represented by a particular number of bits (e.g., 2 bits).
本開示において、当該特定のフィールドは、TCI選択フィールドと呼ばれてもよいが、名称はこれに限られない。 In this disclosure, this particular field may be referred to as a TCI selection field, but the name is not limited to this.
DL DCIの受信と、対応するDLチャネル/信号の受信と、の間のオフセット(以下では、スケジューリングオフセット、トリガリングオフセットなどと読み替えられてもよい)が特定の閾値より小さくてもよい。このとき、UEは、指示TCI状態(ジョイント/DL TCI状態)を利用する受信信号をバッファしてもよい。 The offset (hereinafter, this may be referred to as a scheduling offset, a triggering offset, etc.) between the reception of the DL DCI and the reception of the corresponding DL channel/signal may be smaller than a certain threshold. In this case, the UE may buffer the received signal using the indicated TCI state (joint/DL TCI state).
第1のDCIフォーマット(例えば、DCIフォーマット1_0)によってDLチャネル/信号がスケジュール/トリガされる場合、もしsingle frequency network(SFN)スキーム(例えば、PDSCH用SFNスキーム(RRCパラメータsfnSchemePdsch))が設定される場合には、DLチャネル/信号に複数(例えば、両方/2つ)の指示TCI状態(ジョイント/DL TCI状態)が適用されてもよい。そうでない場合には、DLチャネル/信号に1つ(例えば、第1)の指示TCI状態(ジョイント/DL TCI状態)が適用されてもよい。 When a DL channel/signal is scheduled/triggered by a first DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_0), if a single frequency network (SFN) scheme (e.g., SFN scheme for PDSCH (RRC parameter sfnSchemePdsch)) is configured, multiple (e.g., both/two) indicated TCI states (joint/DL TCI states) may be applied to the DL channel/signal. Otherwise, one (e.g., first) indicated TCI state (joint/DL TCI state) may be applied to the DL channel/signal.
特定のフィールドが含まれない第2のDCIフォーマット(例えば、DCIフォーマット1_1/1_2)によってDLチャネル/信号がスケジュールされる場合、DLチャネル/信号に複数(例えば、両方/2つ)の指示TCI状態(ジョイント/DL TCI状態)が適用されてもよい。 If a DL channel/signal is scheduled by a second DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_1/1_2) that does not include a specific field, multiple (e.g., both/two) indicated TCI states (joint/DL TCI states) may be applied to the DL channel/signal.
図4A-図4Cは、指示TCI状態の適用の他の例を示す図である。図4Aに示す例では、UEに対し、2つの指示TCI状態(第1のTCI状態としてTCI状態#1、第2のTCI状態としてTCI状態#2)が指示される。 Figures 4A-4C show other examples of application of indicated TCI states. In the example shown in Figure 4A, two indicated TCI states (TCI state #1 as the first TCI state and TCI state #2 as the second TCI state) are indicated to the UE.
図4Bに示す例では、DL DCIに、適用する指示TCI状態の数/順番を示すフィールド(TCI選択フィールド)が含まれる。当該フィールドのコードポイント「00」は、第1の指示TCI状態を適用することを示す。当該フィールドのコードポイント「01」は、第2の指示TCI状態を適用することを示す。当該フィールドのコードポイント「10」は、第1の指示TCI状態及び第2の指示TCI状態の両方(both)を適用することを示す。当該フィールドのコードポイント「11」は、使用されない。 In the example shown in Figure 4B, the DL DCI includes a field (TCI selection field) that indicates the number/order of the indicated TCI states to be applied. A code point of "00" in this field indicates that the first indicated TCI state is to be applied. A code point of "01" in this field indicates that the second indicated TCI state is to be applied. A code point of "10" in this field indicates that both the first indicated TCI state and the second indicated TCI state are to be applied. A code point of "11" in this field is unused.
図4Cは、DL DCIによってPDSCHがスケジュールされる例を示している。当該DCIには、コードポイント「00」を示すTCI選択フィールドが含まれる。このため、UEは、PDSCHの受信に、TCI状態#1を適用する(図4C参照)。 Figure 4C shows an example in which PDSCH is scheduled by DL DCI. The DCI includes a TCI selection field indicating codepoint "00". Therefore, the UE applies TCI state #1 to receive PDSCH (see Figure 4C).
スケジューリング/トリガリングDL DCIの受信と、スケジュール/トリガされるDLチャネル/信号の受信と、の間のオフセットが、特定の閾値より大きい(又は、以上)である場合、特定のDCIフィールド(例えば、TCI選択フィールド)が、指示TCI状態を適用されるチャネル/信号を示してもよい。この場合の動作については、以下の動作1及び動作2の少なくとも一方であってもよい。 If the offset between the reception of the scheduling/triggering DL DCI and the reception of the scheduled/triggered DL channel/signal is greater than (or equal to or greater than) a certain threshold, a certain DCI field (e.g., a TCI selection field) may indicate the channel/signal to which the indicated TCI state is to be applied. The operation in this case may be at least one of operation 1 and operation 2 below.
当該特定の閾値は、例えば、既存の(Rel.15/16までに規定される)閾値、Rel.17/18以降に規定されるRRCパラメータ/UE能力情報に基づく値、の少なくとも一方であってもよい。 The specific threshold may be, for example, at least one of an existing threshold (defined up to Rel. 15/16) and a value based on RRC parameters/UE capability information defined in Rel. 17/18 or later.
当該既存の閾値は、例えば、第2の周波数レンジ(例えば、FR2)における、Rel.15で規定されるUE能力情報に基づく値であってもよい。 The existing threshold may be, for example, a value based on UE capability information specified in Rel. 15 in the second frequency range (e.g., FR2).
第1の周波数レンジ(例えば、FR1)においては、当該特定のDCIフィールドは常にDCIに含まれてもよい。 In the first frequency range (e.g., FR1), the particular DCI field may always be included in the DCI.
[動作1]
特定のフィールド(例えば、TCI選択フィールド)は、特定のRRCパラメータが設定された場合に、DL DCIに含まれてもよい。
[Operation 1]
Certain fields (eg, the TCI selection field) may be included in the DL DCI if certain RRC parameters are configured.
DL DCI(例えば、DCIフォーマット1_1/1_2)に含まれる特定のフィールドのコードポイントが第1の値(例えば、「00」)を指示するとき、UEは、当該DCIによってスケジュール/トリガされる、複数(例えば、全て)のDLチャネル/信号(例えば、複数(全ての)PDSCH送信機会のPDSCH DMRSポート)に、特定の指示TCI状態(例えば、第1の指示(ジョイント/DL)TCI状態)を適用してもよい。 When the code point of a specific field included in a DL DCI (e.g., DCI format 1_1/1_2) indicates a first value (e.g., "00"), the UE may apply a specific indication TCI state (e.g., a first indication (joint/DL) TCI state) to multiple (e.g., all) DL channels/signals (e.g., PDSCH DMRS ports of multiple (all) PDSCH transmission opportunities) scheduled/triggered by the DCI.
DL DCI(例えば、DCIフォーマット1_1/1_2)に含まれる特定のフィールドのコードポイントが第2の値(例えば、「01」)を指示するとき、UEは、当該DCIによってスケジュール/トリガされる、複数(例えば、全て)のDLチャネル/信号(例えば、複数(全ての)PDSCH送信機会のPDSCH DMRSポート)に、特定の指示TCI状態(例えば、第2の指示(ジョイント/DL)TCI状態)を適用してもよい。 When the code point of a specific field included in a DL DCI (e.g., DCI format 1_1/1_2) indicates a second value (e.g., "01"), the UE may apply a specific indication TCI state (e.g., a second indication (joint/DL) TCI state) to multiple (e.g., all) DL channels/signals (e.g., PDSCH DMRS ports of multiple (all) PDSCH transmission opportunities) scheduled/triggered by the DCI.
DL DCI(例えば、DCIフォーマット1_1/1_2)に含まれる特定のフィールドのコードポイントが第3の値(例えば、「10」)を指示するとき、UEは、当該DCIによってスケジュール/トリガされるDLチャネル/信号の受信に、複数の指示TCI状態(例えば、第1の指示(ジョイント/DL)TCI状態及び第2の指示(ジョイント/DL)TCI状態の両方)を適用してもよい。 When the code point of a specific field included in a DL DCI (e.g., DCI format 1_1/1_2) indicates a third value (e.g., "10"), the UE may apply multiple indication TCI states (e.g., both the first indication (joint/DL) TCI state and the second indication (joint/DL) TCI state) to reception of the DL channel/signal scheduled/triggered by the DCI.
例えば、DL DCI(例えば、DCIフォーマット1_1/1_2)に含まれる特定のフィールドのコードポイントが第3の値(例えば、「10」)を指示するとき、複数の指示TCI状態は、第1の順番(例えば、第1の指示TCI状態、第2の指示TCI状態の順)で適用されてもよい。 For example, when the code point of a specific field included in a DL DCI (e.g., DCI format 1_1/1_2) indicates a third value (e.g., "10"), multiple indication TCI states may be applied in a first order (e.g., the first indication TCI state, then the second indication TCI state).
上記動作1は、特定の条件において適用されてもよい。特定の条件は、例えば、(もし適用可能であれば(if applicable))少なくともスケジューリング/トリガリングDL DCIの受信と、スケジュール/トリガリングされるDLチャネル/信号の受信と、の間のオフセットが、特定の閾値以上である場合に適用されてもよい。 Operation 1 above may be applied under certain conditions. The certain conditions may be applied, for example, if (if applicable) the offset between at least the reception of the scheduling/triggering DL DCI and the reception of the scheduled/triggered DL channel/signal is equal to or greater than a certain threshold.
[動作2]
特定のフィールド(例えば、TCI選択フィールド)が含まれないDL DCIによって、DLチャネル/信号がスケジュール/トリガされてもよい。UEは、1つ又は複数の特定の指示TCI状態をDLチャネル/信号に適用してもよい。
[Operation 2]
A DL channel/signal may be scheduled/triggered by a DL DCI that does not include a specific field (e.g., a TCI selection field). The UE may apply one or more specific indication TCI states to the DL channel/signal.
この場合、UEに対し、上位レイヤシグナリング(RRC/MAC CE)を用いて、1つ又は複数の指示TCI状態を適用することが設定されてもよい(選択肢0-1)。例えば、UEは、特定のRRCパラメータを用いて、第1の指示TCI状態、第2の指示TCI状態、及び、その両方、のいずれかを、DLチャネル/信号の受信に適用するかを設定されてもよい。 In this case, the UE may be configured to apply one or more indicated TCI states using higher layer signaling (RRC/MAC CE) (options 0-1). For example, the UE may be configured using specific RRC parameters to apply either a first indicated TCI state, a second indicated TCI state, or both to reception of DL channels/signals.
また、この場合、UEは、DLチャネル/信号の受信に第1(又は、第2)の指示TCI状態を適用すると判断してもよい(選択肢0-2)。 In this case, the UE may also decide to apply the first (or second) indicated TCI state to receiving the DL channel/signal (options 0-2).
また、この場合、UEは、DLチャネル/信号の受信に複数の指示TCI状態(例えば、第1の指示TCI状態及び第2の指示TCI状態の両方)を適用すると判断してもよい(選択肢0-3)。 In this case, the UE may also determine that multiple indicated TCI states (e.g., both the first indicated TCI state and the second indicated TCI state) apply to receiving the DL channel/signal (options 0-3).
また、この場合、UEは、DLチャネル/信号をスケジュールしたDL DCIに対応するPDCCHの指示TCI状態と同じ指示TCI状態を、当該DLチャネル/信号に適用すると判断してもよい(選択肢0-4)。 In this case, the UE may also determine to apply to the DL channel/signal the same indicated TCI state as the indicated TCI state of the PDCCH corresponding to the DL DCI that scheduled the DL channel/signal (options 0-4).
また、この場合、UEは、1つ又は複数のTRP用に指示TCI状態を適用してもよい。当該適用は、既存のTCIフィールドを用いて決定されてもよい(選択肢0-5)。 In this case, the UE may also apply the indicated TCI state for one or more TRPs. This may be determined using the existing TCI field (options 0-5).
上記動作2は、特定の条件において適用されてもよい。特定の条件は、例えば、(もし適用可能であれば(if applicable))少なくともスケジューリング/トリガリングDL DCIの受信と、スケジュール/トリガされるDLチャネル/信号の受信と、の間のオフセットが、特定の閾値(例えば、「timeDurationForQCL」)以上である場合に適用されてもよい。 Operation 2 above may be applied under certain conditions. The certain conditions may be applied, for example, when (if applicable) the offset between at least the reception of the scheduling/triggering DL DCI and the reception of the scheduled/triggered DL channel/signal is greater than or equal to a certain threshold (e.g., "timeDurationForQCL").
(分析)
ところで、Rel.18以降では、マルチTRP(例えば、シングルDCIベースマルチTRP(シングルDCIマルチTRP)/マルチDCIベースマルチTRP(マルチDCIマルチTRP))が設定され、かつ、統一TCI状態を適用するケースが導入されることが検討されている。
(analysis)
Incidentally, in Rel. 18 and later, it is being considered to introduce a case in which a multi-TRP (e.g., a single DCI-based multi-TRP (single DCI multi-TRP)/multiple DCI-based multi-TRP (multi-DCI multi-TRP)) is configured and a unified TCI state is applied.
Rel.18以降では、TCI状態のアクティベーションコマンド(MAC CE)によって、TCIコードポイントにマップされた各ジョイント/セパレート(DL/UL)TCI状態が、第1又は第2のジョイント/セパレート(DL/UL)TCI状態であるかが指示されることが想定されている(図5参照)。 In Rel. 18 and later, the TCI state activation command (MAC CE) is expected to indicate whether each joint/separate (DL/UL) TCI state mapped to a TCI codepoint is the first or second joint/separate (DL/UL) TCI state (see Figure 5).
図5は、DLとULに対して同じ(又は、共通の)指示TCI状態が適用/サポートされる場合(ジョイント)のTCIコードポイントにマッピングされるTCI状態の一例を示している。例えば、シングルDCIベースのマルチTRPにおいて、1つのDCI(又は、MAC CE)により、1又は2つのジョイントTCI状態が指示されてもよい。指示されるTCI状態の数は、DCI(例えば、TCI状態選択フィールド)/RRCに基づいて決定されてもよい。 Figure 5 shows an example of TCI states mapped to TCI code points when the same (or common) indicated TCI state applies/supports for DL and UL (joint). For example, in a single DCI-based multi-TRP, one DCI (or MAC CE) may indicate one or two joint TCI states. The number of indicated TCI states may be determined based on the DCI (e.g., TCI state selection field)/RRC.
例えば、第1の指示TCI状態(例えば、第1のTRPに対応する統一TCI状態)と、第2の指示TCI状態(例えば、第2のTRPに対応する統一TCI状態)が指示されてもよい。複数(例えば、2つ)のTRPにそれぞれ対応する複数の指示TCI状態(indicated TCI state)の指示/適用がサポートされる場合、通信状況/通信環境に応じて各TRPにそれぞれ適用される指示TCI状態が更新(又は、新たに指示)されることが想定される。 For example, a first indicated TCI state (e.g., a unified TCI state corresponding to a first TRP) and a second indicated TCI state (e.g., a unified TCI state corresponding to a second TRP) may be indicated. If the indication/application of multiple indicated TCI states corresponding to multiple (e.g., two) TRPs is supported, it is expected that the indicated TCI state applied to each TRP will be updated (or newly indicated) depending on the communication situation/communication environment.
複数の指示TCI状態の指示/適用がサポートされる場合、各指示TCI状態の指示/更新をどのように制御するかについて十分に検討されていない。 If the indication/application of multiple indication TCI states is supported, there has been insufficient consideration given to how to control the indication/update of each indication TCI state.
UEが適用するTCI状態について検討が十分でなければ、適切にTCI状態を適用することができず、通信品質の低下、スループットの低下など、を招くおそれがある。 If the TCI state to be applied by the UE is not sufficiently considered, the TCI state may not be applied appropriately, which could result in deterioration of communication quality, reduced throughput, etc.
そこで、本発明者らは、これらの課題に着目し、統一TCI状態に関する動作について検討し、本実施の形態の一態様を着想した。 The inventors therefore focused on these issues, studied operation in unified TCI states, and came up with one aspect of this embodiment.
以下、本開示に係る実施形態について、図面を参照して詳細に説明する。各実施形態に係る無線通信方法は、それぞれ単独で適用されてもよいし、組み合わせて適用されてもよい。 Embodiments of the present disclosure will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. The wireless communication methods according to the embodiments may be applied independently or in combination.
(各種読み替え)
本開示において、文章中の”()”で囲まれた文言は、その直前の文言についての説明(例えば、スペルの説明)、言い換え、具体例、補足説明などを示してもよい。また、本開示において、文章中の”[]”で囲まれた文言は、これを含めて文章全体の意味が解釈されてもよいし、これを含めずに(無視して)文章全体の意味が解釈されてもよい。なお、”()”、”[]”は、これら以外の用途/意味で用いられてもよい。
(Various reading changes)
In the present disclosure, a word enclosed in "( )" in a sentence may indicate an explanation of the word immediately preceding it (for example, an explanation of spelling), a paraphrase, a specific example, a supplementary explanation, etc. Also, in the present disclosure, a word enclosed in "[ ]" in a sentence may be interpreted including the word in the meaning of the entire sentence, or may be interpreted excluding the word in the meaning of the entire sentence (ignoring the word in the meaning of the entire sentence). Note that "( )" and "[ ]" may also be used for purposes/meanings other than those mentioned above.
本開示において、「A/B」及び「A及びBの少なくとも一方」は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、本開示において、「A/B/C」は、「A、B及びCの少なくとも1つ」を意味してもよい。 In this disclosure, "A/B" and "at least one of A and B" may be interpreted interchangeably. Also, in this disclosure, "A/B/C" may mean "at least one of A, B, and C."
本開示において、通知、アクティベート、ディアクティベート、指示(又は指定(indicate))、選択(select)、設定(configure)、更新(update)、決定(determine)などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、サポートする、制御する、制御できる、動作する、動作できるなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, terms such as notify, activate, deactivate, indicate (or indicate), select, configure, update, and determine may be read interchangeably. In this disclosure, terms such as support, control, controllable, operate, and operateable may be read interchangeably.
本開示において、無線リソース制御(Radio Resource Control(RRC))、RRCパラメータ、RRCメッセージ、上位レイヤパラメータ、フィールド、情報要素(Information Element(IE))、設定などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、Medium Access Control制御要素(MAC Control Element(CE))、更新コマンド、アクティベーション/ディアクティベーションコマンドなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, Radio Resource Control (RRC), RRC parameters, RRC messages, upper layer parameters, fields, information elements (IEs), settings, etc. may be interchangeable. In this disclosure, Medium Access Control control elements (MAC Control Elements (CEs)), update commands, activation/deactivation commands, etc. may be interchangeable.
本開示において、上位レイヤシグナリングは、例えば、Radio Resource Control(RRC)シグナリング、Medium Access Control(MAC)シグナリング、ブロードキャスト情報、その他のメッセージ(例えば、測位用プロトコル(例えば、NR Positioning Protocol A(NRPPa)/LTE Positioning Protocol(LPP))メッセージなどの、コアネットワークからのメッセージ)などのいずれか、又はこれらの組み合わせであってもよい。 In the present disclosure, higher layer signaling may be, for example, Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling, broadcast information, other messages (e.g., messages from the core network such as positioning protocol (e.g., NR Positioning Protocol A (NRPPa)/LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP)) messages), or a combination of these.
本開示において、MACシグナリングは、例えば、MAC制御要素(MAC Control Element(MAC CE))、MAC Protocol Data Unit(PDU)などを用いてもよい。ブロードキャスト情報は、例えば、マスタ情報ブロック(Master Information Block(MIB))、システム情報ブロック(System Information Block(SIB))、最低限のシステム情報(Remaining Minimum System Information(RMSI))、その他のシステム情報(Other System Information(OSI))などであってもよい。 In the present disclosure, MAC signaling may use, for example, a MAC Control Element (MAC CE), a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU), etc. Broadcast information may be, for example, a Master Information Block (MIB), a System Information Block (SIB), Remaining Minimum System Information (RMSI), Other System Information (OSI), etc.
本開示において、物理レイヤシグナリングは、例えば、下りリンク制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))、上りリンク制御情報(Uplink Control Information(UCI))などであってもよい。 In the present disclosure, physical layer signaling may be, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI), etc.
本開示において、マルチ(複数)TRP、マルチTRPシステム、マルチTRP送信、マルチPDSCH、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, multi-TRP, multi-TRP system, multi-TRP transmission, and multi-PDSCH may be interpreted interchangeably.
本開示において、シングルDCI、シングルPDCCH、シングルDCIに基づくマルチTRP、少なくとも1つのTCIコードポイント上の2つのTCI状態をアクティベートされること、TCIフィールドの少なくとも1つのコードポイントが2つのTCI状態にマップされること、特定のチャネル/CORESETに対して特定のインデックス(例えば、TRPインデックス、CORESETプールインデックス、又は、TRPに対応するインデックス)が設定されること、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, the terms single DCI, single PDCCH, multiple TRPs based on a single DCI, activating two TCI states on at least one TCI code point, mapping at least one code point in the TCI field to two TCI states, and setting a specific index (e.g., a TRP index, a CORESET pool index, or an index corresponding to a TRP) for a specific channel/CORESET may be interpreted interchangeably.
本開示において、シングルTRP、シングルTRPを用いるチャネル/信号、1つのTCI状態/空間関係を用いるチャネル、マルチTRPがRRC/DCIによって有効化されないこと、複数のTCI状態/空間関係がRRC/DCIによって有効化されないこと、いずれのCORESETに対しても1のCORESETプールインデックス(CORESETPoolIndex)値が設定されず、且つ、TCIフィールドのいずれのコードポイントも2つのTCI状態にマップされないこと、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, the following may be interpreted interchangeably: single TRP, channel/signal using a single TRP, channel using one TCI state/spatial relationship, multi-TRP not being enabled by RRC/DCI, multiple TCI states/spatial relationships not being enabled by RRC/DCI, a CORESETPoolIndex value of 1 not being set for any CORESET, and no codepoint in the TCI field being mapped to two TCI states.
本開示において、TRP#1(第1TRP)は、CORESETプールインデックス=0に対応してもよいし、TCIフィールドの1つのコードポイントに対応する2つのTCI状態のうちの1番目のTCI状態に対応してもよい。TRP#2(第2TRP)TRP#1(第1TRP)は、CORESETプールインデックス=1に対応してもよいし、TCIフィールドの1つのコードポイントに対応する2つのTCI状態のうちの2番目のTCI状態に対応してもよい。 In the present disclosure, TRP#1 (first TRP) may correspond to CORESET pool index = 0 or may correspond to the first of two TCI states corresponding to one code point in the TCI field. TRP#2 (second TRP) TRP#1 (first TRP) may correspond to CORESET pool index = 1 or may correspond to the second of two TCI states corresponding to one code point in the TCI field.
本開示において、シングルDCI(sDCI)、シングルPDCCH、シングルDCIに基づくマルチTRPシステム、sDCIベースMTRP、少なくとも1つのTCIコードポイント上の2つのTCI状態をアクティベートされること、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, single DCI (sDCI), single PDCCH, multi-TRP system based on single DCI, sDCI-based MTRP, and activation of two TCI states on at least one TCI codepoint may be read interchangeably.
本開示において、ビーム指示DCI、ビーム指示MAC CE、ビーム指示DCI/MAC CEは互いに読み替えられてもよい。言い換えれば、UEに対する指示TCI状態に関する指示は、DCI及びMAC CEの少なくとも1つを用いて行われてもよい。 In the present disclosure, beam instruction DCI, beam instruction MAC CE, and beam instruction DCI/MAC CE may be interpreted interchangeably. In other words, an instruction regarding the instruction TCI status to a UE may be given using at least one of a DCI and a MAC CE.
本開示において、チャネル、信号、チャネル/信号、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、DLチャネル、DL信号、DL信号/チャネル、DL信号/チャネルの送信/受信、DL受信、DL送信、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、ULチャネル、UL信号、UL信号/チャネル、UL信号/チャネルの送信/受信、UL受信、UL送信、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, channel, signal, and channel/signal may be interchangeable. In the present disclosure, DL channel, DL signal, DL signal/channel, transmission/reception of DL signal/channel, DL reception, and DL transmission may be interchangeable. In the present disclosure, UL channel, UL signal, UL signal/channel, transmission/reception of UL signal/channel, UL reception, and UL transmission may be interchangeable.
本開示において、各チャネル/信号/リソースにTCI状態/QCL想定を適用することは、各チャネル/信号/リソースの送受信にTCI状態/QCL想定を適用することを意味してもよい。 In this disclosure, applying TCI state/QCL assumptions to each channel/signal/resource may mean applying TCI state/QCL assumptions to transmission and reception of each channel/signal/resource.
本開示において、第1のTRPに第1のTCI状態(1番目に指示されるTCI状態)が対応してもよい。本開示において、第2のTRPに第2のTCI状態(2番目に指示されるTCI状態)が対応してもよい。本開示において、第nのTRPに第nのTCI状態(n番目に指示されるTCI状態)が対応してもよい。 In the present disclosure, the first TRP may correspond to the first TCI state (the first TCI state indicated). In the present disclosure, the second TRP may correspond to the second TCI state (the second TCI state indicated). In the present disclosure, the nth TRP may correspond to the nth TCI state (the nth TCI state indicated).
本開示において、第1のCORESETプールインデックスの値(例えば、0)、第1のTRPインデックスの値(例えば、1)、及び、第1のTCI状態(第1のDL/UL(ジョイント/セパレート)TCI状態)は互いに対応してもよい。本開示において、第2のCORESETプールインデックスの値(例えば、1)、第2のTRPインデックスの値(例えば、2)、及び、第2のTCI状態(第2のDL/UL(ジョイント/セパレート)TCI状態)は互いに対応してもよい。 In the present disclosure, the first CORESET pool index value (e.g., 0), the first TRP index value (e.g., 1), and the first TCI state (first DL/UL (joint/separate) TCI state) may correspond to each other. In the present disclosure, the second CORESET pool index value (e.g., 1), the second TRP index value (e.g., 2), and the second TCI state (second DL/UL (joint/separate) TCI state) may correspond to each other.
なお、下記本開示の各実施形態においては、複数TRPを利用する送受信における複数のTCI状態の適用について、2つのTRPを対象とする方法(すなわち、N及びMの少なくとも一方が2である場合)について主に説明するが、TRPの数は3以上(複数)であってもよく、TRPの数に対応するよう各実施形態が適用されてもよい。言い換えれば、N及びMの少なくとも一方は、2より大きい数であってもよい。 Note that in the following embodiments of the present disclosure, the application of multiple TCI states in transmission and reception using multiple TRPs will be mainly described in terms of a method targeting two TRPs (i.e., when at least one of N and M is 2), but the number of TRPs may be three or more (multiple), and each embodiment may be applied to correspond to the number of TRPs. In other words, at least one of N and M may be a number greater than 2.
(無線通信方法)
本開示の各実施形態は、特定の上位レイヤパラメータの設定に関わらず適用されてもよいし、1つ以上の特定の上位レイヤパラメータが設定される場合に適用されてもよい。
(Wireless communication method)
Each embodiment of the present disclosure may be applied regardless of the setting of specific upper layer parameters, or may be applied when one or more specific upper layer parameters are set.
当該特定の上位レイヤパラメータは、例えば、DL DCI内にTCI選択フィールドが存在するかを示すパラメータ(例えば、tciSelection-PresentInDCI)、統一TCI状態の適用を示すパラメータ(例えば、followUnifiedTCI-State)、指示TCI状態の適用を示すパラメータ(例えば、applyIndicatedTCIState)、及び、DL DCI内にTCIフィールドが存在するかを示すパラメータ(例えば、tciPresentInDCI)の少なくとも1つであってもよい。 The specific upper layer parameter may be, for example, at least one of a parameter indicating whether a TCI selection field is present in the DL DCI (e.g., tciSelection-PresentInDCI), a parameter indicating the application of a unified TCI state (e.g., followUnifiedTCI-State), a parameter indicating the application of an indicated TCI state (e.g., applyIndicatedTCIState), and a parameter indicating whether a TCI field is present in the DL DCI (e.g., tciPresentInDCI).
以下本開示の各実施形態は、任意のDLチャネル/信号(例えば、PDSCH/PDCCH/A-CSI-RS)の受信に適用されてもよい。以下本開示の各実施形態は、任意のULチャネル/信号(例えば、PUSCH/PUCCH)の送信に適用されてもよい。 Each of the following embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to the reception of any DL channel/signal (e.g., PDSCH/PDCCH/A-CSI-RS). Each of the following embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to the transmission of any UL channel/signal (e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH).
<第1の実施形態>
UEに対して、DCIにより複数(例えば、2以上)の統一TCI状態の指示がサポートされる場合における統一TCI状態の更新制御の一例について説明する。
First Embodiment
An example of unified TCI state update control when DCI supports indication of multiple (e.g., two or more) unified TCI states for a UE is described below.
第1の実施形態は、シングルDCIベースマルチTRPに対して好適に適用されてもよい。もちろんこれに限られず、マルチDCIベースマルチTRP又はシングルTRPに対して適用されてもよい。 The first embodiment may be suitably applied to a single DCI-based multi-TRP. Of course, this is not limited to this, and it may also be applied to a multi-DCI-based multi-TRP or a single TRP.
所定のDCIフォーマットに含まれるTCI状態の指示に利用される所定フィールド(例えば、TCI状態フィールド)のコードポイント(例えば、TCIコードポイント)により、1又は複数(例えば、2つ)の統一TCI状態が指示されてもよい。統一TCI状態は、ジョイントTCI状態、DL TCI状態、UL TCI状態の少なくとも一つを意味してもよい。DCIにより指示される統一TCI状態は、指示TCI状態と読み替えられてもよい。所定のDCIフォーマットは、PDSCHのスケジューリングに利用されるDCIフォーマット(例えば、DCIフォーマット1_1/1_2)であってもよいし、他のDCIフォーマットであってもよい。 One or more (e.g., two) unified TCI states may be indicated by a code point (e.g., TCI code point) in a predetermined field (e.g., TCI state field) used to indicate the TCI state included in a predetermined DCI format. The unified TCI state may mean at least one of the joint TCI state, DL TCI state, and UL TCI state. The unified TCI state indicated by the DCI may be read as the indicated TCI state. The predetermined DCI format may be a DCI format used for PDSCH scheduling (e.g., DCI format 1_1/1_2), or may be another DCI format.
シングルDCIベースのマルチTRPがサポート/設定される場合、1つのDCIのTCI状態フィールドのコードポイントにより、1又は複数(例えば、2つ)の指示TCI状態がUEに指示されてもよい。 If single DCI-based multi-TRP is supported/configured, one or more (e.g., two) indicated TCI states may be indicated to the UE by the codepoint in the TCI status field of one DCI.
DLとULに対して同じ(又は、共通の)指示TCI状態が適用/サポートされる場合(ジョイント)、DCIにより{第1ジョイントTCI状態、第2ジョイントTCI状態}がUEに指示されてもよい。第1ジョイントTCI状態は第1のTRPに適用され、第2ジョイントTCI状態は第2のTRPに適用されてもよい。 If the same (or common) indicated TCI state applies/supports for DL and UL (joint), the DCI may indicate {first joint TCI state, second joint TCI state} to the UE. The first joint TCI state may apply to the first TRP, and the second joint TCI state may apply to the second TRP.
DLとULに対して別々の指示TCI状態が適用/サポートされる場合(セパレート)、DCIにより{第1DL TCI状態、第1UL TCI状態、第2DL TCI状態、第2UL TCI状態}がUEに指示されてもよい。第1DL TCI状態と第1UL TCI状態は第1のTRPに適用され、第2DL TCI状態と第2UL TCI状態は第2のTRPに適用されてもよい。 If separate TCI states are applied/supported for DL and UL (separate), the DCI may indicate {first DL TCI state, first UL TCI state, second DL TCI state, second UL TCI state} to the UE. The first DL TCI state and first UL TCI state may apply to the first TRP, and the second DL TCI state and second UL TCI state may apply to the second TRP.
複数(例えば、2つ)の指示TCI状態がUEに指示された後(又は、UEが複数の指示TCI状態を有する場合)、当該UEに対して一部の指示TCI状態(例えば、指示TCI状態のサブセット)が指示されてもよい。 After multiple (e.g., two) indicated TCI states have been indicated to the UE (or if the UE has multiple indicated TCI states), some of the indicated TCI states (e.g., a subset of the indicated TCI states) may be indicated to the UE.
例えば、DLとULに対して同じ(又は、共通の)指示TCI状態が適用/サポートされる場合(ジョイント)、{第1ジョイントTCI状態、第2ジョイントTCI状態}のサブセット(又は、一部)が指示されてもよい。DLとULに対して別々の指示TCI状態が適用/サポートされる場合(セパレート)、{第1DL TCI状態、第1UL TCI状態、第2DL TCI状態、第2UL TCI状態}のサブセット(又は、一部)が指示されてもよい。 For example, if the same (or common) indication TCI state applies/supports for DL and UL (joint), a subset (or part) of {first joint TCI state, second joint TCI state} may be indicated. If separate indication TCI states apply/supports for DL and UL (separate), a subset (or part) of {first DL TCI state, first UL TCI state, second DL TCI state, second UL TCI state} may be indicated.
ネットワーク(例えば、基地局)は、ジョイントDL/UL TCIモードが設定されたサービングセルに対して、{第1のジョイントTCI状態、第2のジョイントTCI状態}のフルセット又はサブセットを、TCI状態アクティベーションコマンド(例えば、MAC CE)により、所定DCIフォーマットのTCI状態フィールドのコードポイントにマッピングしてもよい。 For a serving cell configured with a joint DL/UL TCI mode, the network (e.g., a base station) may map the full set or a subset of {first joint TCI state, second joint TCI state} to code points in the TCI state field of a specified DCI format using a TCI state activation command (e.g., MAC CE).
ネットワーク(例えば、基地局)は、セパレートDL/UL TCIモードが設定されたサービングセルに対して、{第1DL TCI状態、第1UL TCI状態、第2DL TCI状態、第2UL TCI状態}のフルセット又はサブセットを、TCI状態アクティベーションコマンド(例えば、MAC CE)により、所定DCIフォーマットのTCI状態フィールドのコードポイントにマッピングしてもよい。 For a serving cell configured with separate DL/UL TCI mode, the network (e.g., a base station) may map the full set or a subset of {first DL TCI state, first UL TCI state, second DL TCI state, second UL TCI state} to code points in the TCI state field of a specified DCI format using a TCI state activation command (e.g., MAC CE).
UEは、受信したTCIコードポイントにマッピングされた対応する第1/第2のジョイント/DL/UL TCI状態に従って、第1/第2の指示されたジョイント/DL/UL TCI状態を更新してもよい。UEに統一TCI状態のサブセットが指示される場合、UEは新たに指示されたTCI状態を更新し、他のTCI状態(例えば、指示されなかったTCI状態)を更新せず維持してもよい。 The UE may update the first/second indicated joint/DL/UL TCI state according to the corresponding first/second joint/DL/UL TCI state mapped to the received TCI code point. If a subset of the unified TCI state is indicated to the UE, the UE may update the newly indicated TCI state and keep other TCI states (e.g., non-indicated TCI states) without updating them.
例えば、UEに対して、DCIにより{第1ジョイントTCI状態、第2ジョイントTCI状態}のサブセット(又は、一部)が指示される場合、UEは、指示されたジョイントTCI状態を更新し、指示されなかったジョイントTCI状態(例えば、更新されないTCI状態)を維持してもよい(図6参照)。図6では、第1のジョイントTCI状態(ここでは、TCI状態#A1)と第2のジョイントTCI状態(ここでは、TCI状態#B1)を適用/有するUEに対して、DCIによりサブセット(ここでは、第1のジョイントTCI状態(TCI状態#A2))が指示される場合を示している。この場合、UEは、第1のジョイントTCI状態を更新し(TCI状態#A1→TCI状態#A2)、第2のジョイントTCI状態を維持してもよい。 For example, if the DCI indicates a subset (or part) of {first joint TCI state, second joint TCI state} to the UE, the UE may update the indicated joint TCI state and maintain the joint TCI state that was not indicated (e.g., the TCI state that is not updated) (see Figure 6). Figure 6 shows a case where the DCI indicates a subset (here, the first joint TCI state (TCI state #A2)) to a UE that applies/has the first joint TCI state (here, TCI state #A1) and the second joint TCI state (here, TCI state #B1). In this case, the UE may update the first joint TCI state (TCI state #A1 → TCI state #A2) and maintain the second joint TCI state.
UEに対して、{第1DL TCI状態、第1UL TCI状態、第2DL TCI状態、第2UL TCI状態}のサブセット(又は、一部)が指示される場合、UEは、指示されたDL/UL TCI状態を更新し、指示されなかったDL/UL TCI状態(例えば、更新されないTCI状態)を維持してもよい。 If a subset (or part) of {first DL TCI state, first UL TCI state, second DL TCI state, second UL TCI state} is indicated to the UE, the UE may update the indicated DL/UL TCI states and maintain the non-indicated DL/UL TCI states (e.g., non-updated TCI states).
このように、サブセットが指示される場合に、一部の指示TCI状態を更新し他の指示TCI状態を維持することにより、複数の指示TCI状態がサポートされる場合であっても、指示TCI状態の更新を柔軟に制御することが可能となる。 In this way, when a subset is indicated, some of the indicated TCI states are updated while other indicated TCI states are maintained, making it possible to flexibly control the updating of the indicated TCI states even when multiple indicated TCI states are supported.
統一TCI状態(例えば、ジョイントTCI状態、DL/UL TCI状態)のサブセットの指示は、DCIに含まれるTCI状態フィールドのコードポイントにマッピングされる統一TCI状態の数(又は、1つのジョイントTCI状態、1つのDL/ULTCI状態がマッピングされる)に基づいて決定されてもよい。UEは、TCI状態フィールドで指示されるコードポイントにマッピングされるTCI状態が一部(例えば、ジョイントの場合は1つ、セパレートの場合は2つ)の場合、サブセットが指示されたと判断してもよい。 The indication of a subset of unified TCI states (e.g., joint TCI states, DL/UL TCI states) may be determined based on the number of unified TCI states (or one joint TCI state, one DL/UL TCI state) mapped to the code point of the TCI state field included in the DCI. The UE may determine that a subset is indicated if only some of the TCI states (e.g., one for joint and two for separate) are mapped to the code point indicated in the TCI state field.
統一TCI状態(例えば、ジョイントTCI状態、DL/UL TCI状態)のサブセットの指示は、DCIに含まれる所定フィールド(例えば、TCI状態選択フィールド)に基づいて決定されてもよい。例えば、TCI状態フィールドにより、複数(例えば、ジョイントの場合2つ、セパレートの場合4つ)統一TCI状態がマッピングされるTCIコードポイントが指示される場合であっても、TCI状態選択フィールドにより一部のTCI状態が指示される場合、UEは、サブセットが指示されると判断してもよい。 The indication of a subset of unified TCI states (e.g., joint TCI states, DL/UL TCI states) may be determined based on a predetermined field (e.g., TCI state selection field) included in the DCI. For example, even if the TCI state field indicates a TCI codepoint to which multiple unified TCI states (e.g., two for joint, four for separate) are mapped, if the TCI state selection field indicates only some of the TCI states, the UE may determine that a subset is indicated.
[UE動作]
UEは、統一TCI状態に関するリスト(例えば、統一TCI状態に関する上位レイヤパラメータ(dl-OrJointTCi-StattList))が設定され、複数(例えば、2つ)の指示TCI状態を有する場合、指示されるTCI状態又は受信したTCIコードポイントに基づいて、指示TCI状態の更新を制御してもよい。UEは、{第1、第2}の指示TCI状態({first,second} indicated TCI-State(s))/{第1、第2}のUL TCI({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s))のサブセットがマッピングされたTCIコードポイントを受信した場合、{第1、第2}の指示TCI状態({first,second} indicated TCI-State(s))/{第1、第2}のUL TCI({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s))を更新し、受信したTCIコードポイントにより更新されない他の{第1、第2}の指示TCI状態({first,second} indicated TCI-State(s))/{第1、第2}のUL TCI({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s))を維持してもよい。
UE Operation
When a list for the unified TCI state (e.g., an upper layer parameter for the unified TCI state (dl-OrJointTCi-StattList)) is configured and has multiple (e.g., two) indicated TCI states, the UE may control the update of the indicated TCI state based on the indicated TCI state or the received TCI code point. When the UE receives a TCI codepoint to which a subset of the {first,second} indicated TCI-State(s)/{first,second} UL TCI ({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s)) is mapped, the UE may update the {first,second} indicated TCI-State(s)/{first,second} UL TCI ({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s)) and may maintain the other {first,second} indicated TCI-State(s)/{first,second} UL TCI ({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s)) that are not updated by the received TCI codepoint.
<第2の実施形態>
UEに対して、MAC CEにより複数(例えば、2以上)の統一TCI状態の指示がサポートされる場合における統一TCI状態の更新制御の一例について説明する。
Second Embodiment
An example of unified TCI state update control will be described when multiple (eg, two or more) unified TCI state indications are supported by the MAC CE for the UE.
第2の実施形態は、指示TCI状態がMAC CEにより指示される場合に好適に適用されてもよい。第2の実施形態は、シングルDCIベースマルチTRP、及びマルチDCIベースマルチTRP(又は、複数(例えば、2つ)のCORESETプールインデックスが設定される場合)の少なくとも一つに対して適用されてもよい。もちろんこれに限られず、シングルTRPに対して適用されてもよい。第2の実施形態は単独で適用されてもよいし、第1の実施形態と組み合わせて適用されてもよい。 The second embodiment may be suitably applied when the indicated TCI state is indicated by a MAC CE. The second embodiment may be applied to at least one of a single DCI-based multi-TRP and a multi-DCI-based multi-TRP (or when multiple (e.g., two) CORESET pool indices are set). Of course, this is not limited to this, and the second embodiment may also be applied to a single TRP. The second embodiment may be applied alone or in combination with the first embodiment.
統一TCI状態のアクティベーション/ディアクティベーションに利用されるMAC CEにより、指示TCI状態(例えば、指示ジョイント/DL/UL TCI状態)が指示されてもよい。例えば、サービングセル/TRPに対して、所定数(例えば、1つ)のTCI状態が当該MAC CEで指示される(例えば、1つのTCI状態が当該MAC CEによりTCIコードポイントにマッピングされる)場合、当該MAC CEにより指示TCI状態が指示されてもよい。 The indicated TCI state (e.g., indicated joint/DL/UL TCI state) may be indicated by the MAC CE used for activation/deactivation of the unified TCI state. For example, if a predetermined number (e.g., one) of TCI states are indicated by the MAC CE for a serving cell/TRP (e.g., one TCI state is mapped to a TCI code point by the MAC CE), the indicated TCI state may be indicated by the MAC CE.
DLとULに対して同じ(又は、共通の)指示TCI状態が適用/サポートされる場合(ジョイント)、統一TCI状態のアクティベーション/ディアクティベーション用のMAC CEにより{第1ジョイントTCI状態、第2ジョイントTCI状態}がUEに指示されてもよい。第1ジョイントTCI状態は第1のTRPに適用され、第2ジョイントTCI状態は第2のTRPに適用されてもよい。 If the same (or common) indicated TCI state applies/supports for DL and UL (joint), {first joint TCI state, second joint TCI state} may be indicated to the UE by the MAC CE for activation/deactivation of the unified TCI state. The first joint TCI state may apply to the first TRP, and the second joint TCI state may apply to the second TRP.
DLとULに対して別々の指示TCI状態が適用/サポートされる場合(セパレート)、統一TCI状態のアクティベーション/ディアクティベーション用のMAC CEに{第1DL TCI状態、第1UL TCI状態、第2DL TCI状態、第2UL TCI状態}がUEに指示されてもよい。第1DL TCI状態と第1UL TCI状態は第1のTRPに適用され、第2DL TCI状態と第2UL TCI状態は第2のTRPに適用されてもよい。 If separate TCI states are applied/supported for DL and UL (separate), the MAC CE for activation/deactivation of the unified TCI state may indicate {first DL TCI state, first UL TCI state, second DL TCI state, second UL TCI state} to the UE. The first DL TCI state and the first UL TCI state may apply to the first TRP, and the second DL TCI state and the second UL TCI state may apply to the second TRP.
複数(例えば、2つ)の指示TCI状態がUEに指示された後(又は、UEが複数の指示TCI状態を有する場合)、当該UEに対してMAC CEにより一部の指示TCI状態(例えば、指示TCI状態のサブセット)が指示されてもよい。複数(例えば、2つ)の指示TCI状態は、DCIにより指示されてもよいし、MAC CEにより指示されてもよい。 After multiple (e.g., two) indicated TCI states have been indicated to the UE (or if the UE has multiple indicated TCI states), some of the indicated TCI states (e.g., a subset of the indicated TCI states) may be indicated to the UE by the MAC CE. The multiple (e.g., two) indicated TCI states may be indicated by the DCI or by the MAC CE.
例えば、DLとULに対して同じ(又は、共通の)指示TCI状態が適用/サポートされる場合(ジョイント)、MAC CEにより{第1ジョイントTCI状態、第2ジョイントTCI状態}のサブセット(又は、一部)が指示されてもよい。DLとULに対して別々の指示TCI状態が適用/サポートされる場合(セパレート)、MAC CEにより{第1DL TCI状態、第1UL TCI状態、第2DL TCI状態、第2UL TCI状態}のサブセット(又は、一部)が指示されてもよい。 For example, if the same (or common) indication TCI state applies/supports for DL and UL (joint), the MAC CE may indicate a subset (or part) of {first joint TCI state, second joint TCI state}. If separate indication TCI states apply/supports for DL and UL (separate), the MAC CE may indicate a subset (or part) of {first DL TCI state, first UL TCI state, second DL TCI state, second UL TCI state}.
ネットワーク(例えば、基地局)は、ジョイントDL/UL TCIモードが設定されたサービングセルに対して、{第1のジョイントTCI状態、第2のジョイントTCI状態}のフルセット又はサブセットを、TCI状態アクティベーションコマンド(例えば、MAC CE)により、所定DCIフォーマットのTCI状態フィールドのコードポイントにマッピングしてもよい。 For a serving cell configured with a joint DL/UL TCI mode, the network (e.g., a base station) may map the full set or a subset of {first joint TCI state, second joint TCI state} to code points in the TCI state field of a specified DCI format using a TCI state activation command (e.g., MAC CE).
ネットワーク(例えば、基地局)は、セパレートDL/UL TCIモードが設定されたサービングセルに対して、{第1DL TCI状態、第1UL TCI状態、第2DL TCI状態、第2UL TCI状態}のフルセット又はサブセットを、TCI状態アクティベーションコマンド(例えば、MAC CE)により、所定DCIフォーマットのTCI状態フィールドのコードポイントにマッピングしてもよい。 For a serving cell configured with separate DL/UL TCI mode, the network (e.g., a base station) may map the full set or a subset of {first DL TCI state, first UL TCI state, second DL TCI state, second UL TCI state} to code points in the TCI state field of a specified DCI format using a TCI state activation command (e.g., MAC CE).
UEは、MAC CEにより指示TCI状態が指示される場合(例えば、サービングセル/TRPに対して、所定数(例えば、1つ)のTCI状態がMAC CEでアクティブ化される場合)、MAC CEで指示されるTCI状態に基づいて、第1/第2の指示されたジョイント/DL/UL TCI状態を更新してもよい。UEに統一TCI状態のサブセットが指示される場合、UEはMAC CEにより新たに指示されたTCI状態を更新し、他のTCI状態(例えば、指示されなかったTCI状態)を更新せず維持してもよい(図7参照)。 If the MAC CE indicates an indicated TCI state (e.g., if a predetermined number (e.g., one) of TCI states are activated in the MAC CE for the serving cell/TRP), the UE may update the first/second indicated joint/DL/UL TCI state based on the TCI state indicated in the MAC CE. If the UE is indicated a subset of the unified TCI state, the UE may update the newly indicated TCI state by the MAC CE and keep the other TCI states (e.g., non-indicated TCI states) without updating them (see Figure 7).
図7では、第1のジョイントTCI状態(ここでは、TCI状態#A1)と第2のジョイントTCI状態(ここでは、TCI状態#B1)を適用/有するUEに対して、MAC CEによりサブセット(ここでは、第1のジョイントTCI状態(TCI状態#A2))が指示される場合を示している。この場合、UEは、第1のジョイントTCI状態を更新し(TCI状態#A1→TCI状態#A2)、第2のジョイントTCI状態を維持してもよい。 Figure 7 shows a case where a subset (here, the first joint TCI state (TCI state #A2)) is indicated by the MAC CE to a UE that applies/has a first joint TCI state (here, TCI state #A1) and a second joint TCI state (here, TCI state #B1). In this case, the UE may update the first joint TCI state (TCI state #A1 → TCI state #A2) and maintain the second joint TCI state.
このように、サブセットが指示される場合に、一部の指示TCI状態を更新し他の指示TCI状態を維持することにより、複数の指示TCI状態がサポートされる場合であっても、指示TCI状態の更新を柔軟に制御することが可能となる。 In this way, when a subset is indicated, some of the indicated TCI states are updated while other indicated TCI states are maintained, making it possible to flexibly control the updating of the indicated TCI states even when multiple indicated TCI states are supported.
[UE動作]
UEは、統一TCI状態に関するリスト(例えば、統一TCI状態に関する上位レイヤパラメータ(dl-OrJointTCi-StattList))が設定され、複数(例えば、2つ)の指示TCI状態を有する場合、MAC CE(例えば、TCI状態アクティベーションコマンド)により指示されるTCI状態又は受信したTCIコードポイントに基づいて、指示TCI状態の更新を制御してもよい。UEは、{第1、第2}の指示TCI状態({first,second} indicated TCI-State(s))/{第1、第2}のUL TCI({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s))のサブセットがマッピングされたTCIコードポイント、及び当該サブセットを指示するMAC CEを受信した場合、{第1、第2}の指示TCI状態({first,second} indicated TCI-State(s))/{第1、第2}のUL TCI({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s))を更新し、受信したTCIコードポイント又は当該MAC CEにより更新されない他の{第1、第2}の指示TCI状態({first,second} indicated TCI-State(s))/{第1、第2}のUL TCI({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s))を維持してもよい。
UE Operation
When a list for the unified TCI state (e.g., a higher layer parameter for the unified TCI state (dl-OrJointTCi-StattList)) is configured and has multiple (e.g., two) indicated TCI states, the UE may control updating of the indicated TCI state based on the TCI state indicated by the MAC CE (e.g., a TCI State Activation Command) or the received TCI codepoint. When the UE receives a TCI codepoint to which a subset of the {first,second} indicated TCI-State(s)/{first,second} UL TCI ({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s)) is mapped and a MAC CE indicating the subset, the UE may update the {first,second} indicated TCI-State(s)/{first,second} UL TCI ({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s)) and may maintain other {first,second} indicated TCI-State(s)/{first,second} UL TCI ({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s)) that are not updated by the received TCI codepoint or the MAC CE.
TCI状態アクティベーション用のMAC CEは、例えば、図8に示す構成であってもよい。図8は、マルチDCIベースのマルチTRP用の統一TCI状態(又は、CORESETプールインデックスが設定される場合の統一TCI状態)のアクティベーション用MAC CEに適用されてもよい。例えば、Rel.18以降でサポートされる統一TCI状態アクティベーション/ディアクティベーション用のMAC CEが適用されてもよい。 The MAC CE for TCI state activation may have the configuration shown in Figure 8, for example. Figure 8 may be applied to a MAC CE for activation of a unified TCI state for multi-DCI-based multi-TRP (or a unified TCI state when a CORESET pool index is set). For example, a MAC CE for unified TCI state activation/deactivation supported in Rel. 18 and later may be applied.
当該MAC CEに含まれるCORESETプールインデックスのフィールドにより、各CORESET(又は、各TRP)に対して、各DCIに含まれるTCI状態フィールドのTCIコードポイントに対して、ジョイント/DL/UL TCI状態がそれぞれマッピングされてもよい。 The CORESET pool index field included in the MAC CE may map the joint/DL/UL TCI status to the TCI codepoint in the TCI status field included in each DCI for each CORESET (or each TRP).
CORESETプールインデックスが任意のCORESETに対して設定される場合、UEが統一TCI状態アクティベーション/ディアクティベーション用のMAC CEによりTCIコードポイント内の{第1、第2}の指示TCI状態({first,second} indicated TCI-State(s))/{第1、第2}のUL TCI({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s))を受信してもよい。この場合、UEは、{第1、第2}の指示TCI状態({first,second} indicated TCI-State(s))/{第1、第2}のUL TCI({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s))を更新し、当該MAC CEによりTCIコードポイント内で更新されない他の{第1、第2}の指示TCI状態({first,second} indicated TCI-State(s))/{第1、第2}のUL TCI({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s))を維持してもよい。 If the CORESET pool index is configured for any CORESET, the UE may receive {first,second} indicated TCI states ({first,second} indicated TCI-State(s))/{first,second} UL TCIs ({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s)) in the TCI codepoint via the MAC CE for unified TCI state activation/deactivation. In this case, the UE may update the {first,second} indicated TCI-State(s)/{first,second} UL TCI ({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s)) and maintain the other {first,second} indicated TCI-State(s)/{first,second} UL TCI ({first,second} TCI-UL-State(s)) that are not updated within the TCI codepoint by the MAC CE.
<第3の実施形態>
UEに対して、MAC CEにより統一TCI状態(例えば、UL TCI/DL TCI)の指示がサポートされる場合における統一TCI状態の更新制御の一例について説明する。
Third Embodiment
An example of unified TCI state update control will be described when the MAC CE supports indication of unified TCI state (eg, UL TCI/DL TCI) to the UE.
第3の実施形態は、指示TCI状態がMAC CEにより指示される場合に好適に適用されてもよい。第3の実施形態は、シングルTRPにおいて、UL TCIとDL TCIがMAC CEにより指示/更新される場合(例えば、Rel.17の統一TCI状態)に好適に適用されてもよい。第3の実施形態は単独で適用されてもよいし、第1の実施形態/第2の実施形態と組み合わせて適用されてもよい。 The third embodiment may be suitably applied when the indicated TCI state is indicated by the MAC CE. The third embodiment may be suitably applied when the UL TCI and DL TCI are indicated/updated by the MAC CE in a single TRP (e.g., the unified TCI state in Rel. 17). The third embodiment may be applied alone or in combination with the first embodiment/second embodiment.
統一TCI状態のアクティベーション/ディアクティベーションに利用されるMAC CEにより、UL TCI状態/DL TCI状態が指示されてもよい。例えば、シングルTRPの統一TCI状態において、DLとULに対して別々の指示TCI状態が適用/サポートされる場合(セパレート)、当該MAC CEにより、DCIに含まれるTCI状態フィールドのTCIコードポイントに対して、UL TCI状態/DL TCI状態(例えば、{UL TCI、DL TCI})がマッピングされる。 The UL TCI state/DL TCI state may be indicated by the MAC CE used for activation/deactivation of the unified TCI state. For example, if separate indicated TCI states are applied/supported for DL and UL in the unified TCI state of a single TRP (separate), the MAC CE maps the UL TCI state/DL TCI state (e.g., {UL TCI, DL TCI}) to the TCI code point of the TCI state field included in the DCI.
この場合、あるTCIコードポイントにおいて、{UL TCI、DL TCI}の一部のみ(又は、サブセット)がMAC CEにより更新されてもよい。一部のTCI状態のみがMAC CEにより指示される場合、当該MAC CEに指示されたTCI状態が更新され、指示されていない他方のTCI状態は更新されない(過去に指示されているTCI状態を維持する)ように制御されてもよい。 In this case, at a certain TCI codepoint, only a part (or a subset) of the {UL TCI, DL TCI} may be updated by the MAC CE. If only some of the TCI states are indicated by the MAC CE, the TCI states indicated by the MAC CE may be updated, and the other TCI states not indicated may be controlled not to be updated (the previously indicated TCI states may be maintained).
つまり、{UL TCI、DL TCI}のサブセットがTCIコードポイントにおいて指示される場合、UEは、指示された{UL TCI、DL TCI}を更新し、当該MAC CEにより更新されない他の指示された{UL TCI、DL TCI}を維持する。 That is, if a subset of {UL TCI, DL TCI} is indicated in the TCI codepoint, the UE updates the indicated {UL TCI, DL TCI} and maintains the other indicated {UL TCI, DL TCI} that are not updated by the MAC CE.
TCI状態アクティベーション用のMAC CEは、例えば、図9に示す構成であってもよい。図9は、シングルTRP用の統一TCI状態用のMAC CE(例えば、Rel.17でサポートされる統一TCI状態アクティベーション/ディアクティベーション用のMAC CE)であってもよい。 The MAC CE for TCI state activation may have the configuration shown in Figure 9, for example. Figure 9 may be a MAC CE for unified TCI state for a single TRP (for example, a MAC CE for unified TCI state activation/deactivation supported in Rel. 17).
<補足>
<<UEへの情報の通知>>
上述の実施形態における[ネットワーク(Network(NW))(例えば、基地局(Base Station(BS)))から]UEへの任意の情報の通知(言い換えると、UEにおけるBSからの任意の情報の受信)は、物理レイヤシグナリング(例えば、DCI)、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えば、RRCシグナリング、MAC CE)、特定の信号/チャネル(例えば、PDCCH、PDSCH、参照信号)、又はこれらの組み合わせを用いて行われてもよい。
<Additional Information>
<<Notification of information to UE>>
In the above-described embodiments, any information may be notified to the UE [from a network (NW) (e.g., a base station (BS)] (in other words, the UE receives any information from the BS) using physical layer signaling (e.g., DCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), a specific signal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, PDSCH, reference signal), or a combination thereof.
上記通知がMAC CEによって行われる場合、当該MAC CEは、既存の規格では規定されていない新たな論理チャネルID(Logical Channel ID(LCID))がMACサブヘッダに含まれることによって識別されてもよい。 If the above notification is made by a MAC CE, the MAC CE may be identified by including a new Logical Channel ID (LCID) in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.
上記通知がDCIによって行われる場合、上記通知は、当該DCIの特定のフィールド、当該DCIに付与される巡回冗長検査(Cyclic Redundancy Check(CRC))ビットのスクランブルに用いられる無線ネットワーク一時識別子(Radio Network Temporary Identifier(RNTI))、当該DCIのフォーマットなどによって行われてもよい。 If the notification is made by DCI, the notification may be made by a specific field of the DCI, a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI) used to scramble the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) bits assigned to the DCI, the format of the DCI, etc.
また、上述の実施形態におけるUEへの任意の情報の通知は、周期的、セミパーシステント又は非周期的に行われてもよい。 Furthermore, notification of any information to the UE in the above-described embodiments may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.
<<UEからの情報の通知>>
上述の実施形態におけるUEから[NWへ]の任意の情報の通知(言い換えると、UEにおけるBSへの任意の情報の送信/報告)は、物理レイヤシグナリング(例えば、UCI)、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えば、RRCシグナリング、MAC CE)、特定の信号/チャネル(例えば、PUCCH、PUSCH、PRACH、参照信号)、又はこれらの組み合わせを用いて行われてもよい。
<<Notification of information from UE>>
In the above-described embodiments, notification of any information from the UE [to the NW] (in other words, transmission/reporting of any information from the UE to the BS) may be performed using physical layer signaling (e.g., UCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), specific signals/channels (e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH, reference signals), or a combination thereof.
上記通知がMAC CEによって行われる場合、当該MAC CEは、既存の規格では規定されていない新たなLCIDがMACサブヘッダに含まれることによって識別されてもよい。 If the above notification is made by a MAC CE, the MAC CE may be identified by including a new LCID in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.
上記通知がUCIによって行われる場合、上記通知は、PUCCH又はPUSCHを用いて送信されてもよい。 If the notification is made by UCI, the notification may be transmitted using PUCCH or PUSCH.
また、上述の実施形態におけるUEからの任意の情報の通知は、周期的、セミパーシステント又は非周期的に行われてもよい。 Furthermore, any information notification from the UE in the above-described embodiments may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.
<<各実施形態の適用について>>
UE/BSにおいて、上述の実施形態の少なくとも1つについての特定の(1つ又は複数の)処理/動作/制御/想定/情報は、以下のいずれか又はこれらの複数の条件を満たす場合に適用されてもよい(用いられてもよい):
・上記特定の処理/動作/制御/想定/情報を示す上位レイヤパラメータが設定される、
・上記特定の処理/動作/制御/想定/情報が、関連する上位レイヤパラメータに基づいて決定される、
・上記特定の処理/動作/制御/想定/情報が、MAC CE/DCI/UCI/リソース/チャネル/RSによって、指定/アクティベート/トリガされる、
・上記特定の処理/動作/制御/想定/情報を示す(又は、に関連する)特定のUE能力(UE capability)を、報告する又はサポートする、
・上記特定の処理/動作/制御/想定/情報の適用が、特定の条件に基づいて判断される。
<<Application of each embodiment>>
In a UE/BS, the specific process/operation/control/assumption/information(s) of at least one of the above-described embodiments may be applied (used) when one or more of the following conditions are met:
- Upper layer parameters indicating the specific processing/operation/control/assumption/information are set;
The specific process/action/control/assumption/information is determined based on relevant higher layer parameters;
The specific process/action/control/assumption/information is specified/activated/triggered by MAC CE/DCI/UCI/resource/channel/RS,
Reporting or supporting specific UE capabilities indicating (or relating to) the specific processes/actions/controls/assumptions/information;
The application of the specific process/action/control/assumption/information is determined based on specific conditions.
上記特定のUE能力は、以下の少なくとも1つを示してもよい:
・上記特定の処理/動作/制御/想定/情報(例えば、指示TCI状態のサブセットが指示される場合の更新)をサポートすること、
・指示TCI状態のサブセットの指示をサポートすること、
・指示TCI状態のサブセットの指示に基づく一部の指示TCI状態の更新をサポートすること。
The specific UE capabilities may indicate at least one of the following:
Supporting the above specific processes/actions/controls/assumptions/information (e.g., updates when a subset of the indicated TCI states is indicated);
Supporting indication of a subset of the indicated TCI states;
Supporting updating of some indication TCI states based on indication of a subset of indication TCI states.
また、上記特定のUE能力は、全周波数にわたって(周波数に関わらず共通に)適用される能力であってもよいし、周波数(例えば、セル、バンド、バンドコンビネーション、BWP、コンポーネントキャリアなどの1つ又はこれらの組み合わせ)ごとの能力であってもよいし、周波数レンジ(例えば、Frequency Range 1(FR1)、FR2、FR3、FR4、FR5、FR2-1、FR2-2)ごとの能力であってもよいし、サブキャリア間隔(SubCarrier Spacing(SCS))ごとの能力であってもよいし、Feature Set(FS)又はFeature Set Per Component-carrier(FSPC)ごとの能力であってもよい。 Furthermore, the above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that are applied across all frequencies (commonly regardless of frequency), capabilities for each frequency (e.g., one or a combination of cell, band, band combination, BWP, component carrier, etc.), capabilities for each frequency range (e.g., Frequency Range 1 (FR1), FR2, FR3, FR4, FR5, FR2-1, FR2-2), capabilities for each subcarrier spacing (SubCarrier Spacing (SCS)), or capabilities for each Feature Set (FS) or Feature Set Per Component-carrier (FSPC)).
また、上記特定のUE能力は、全複信方式にわたって(複信方式に関わらず共通に)適用される能力であってもよいし、複信方式(例えば、時分割複信(Time Division Duplex(TDD))、周波数分割複信(Frequency Division Duplex(FDD)))ごとの能力であってもよい。 Furthermore, the above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that apply across all duplexing methods (commonly regardless of the duplexing method), or may be capabilities for each duplexing method (e.g., Time Division Duplex (TDD) or Frequency Division Duplex (FDD)).
UE/BSは、上記条件が満たされない場合、既存の3GPPリリースにおいて規定される動作に従ってもよい。 If the above conditions are not met, the UE/BS may follow the behavior specified in existing 3GPP releases.
(付記)
本開示の一実施形態に関して、以下の発明を付記する。
[付記1]
複数の指示Transmission Configuration Indication(TCI)状態を指示する下り制御情報及びMAC制御要素(MAC Control Element(MAC CE))の少なくとも一つを受信する受信部と、
前記複数の指示TCI状態に基づいて下りリンク受信及び上りリンク送信の少なくとも一つを制御する制御部と、を有し、
前記制御部は、複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを示す情報を受信した場合、前記サブセットを示す情報に基づいて、前記複数の指示TCI状態の一部の指示TCI状態を更新し、残りの指示TCI状態を維持する端末。
[付記2]
前記複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを示す情報は、前記複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットがマッピングされたコードポイントを有する下り制御情報である付記1に記載の端末。
[付記3]
前記複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを示す情報は、前記複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを下り制御情報に含まれるTCI状態フィールドのコードポイントにマッピングするMAC CEである付記1又は付記2に記載の端末。
[付記4]
前記複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを示す情報は、下りリンク用のTCI状態及び上りリンク用のTCI状態の一方を下り制御情報に含まれるTCI状態フィールドのコードポイントにマッピングするMAC CEである付記1から付記3のいずれかに記載の端末。
(Additional Note)
The following inventions are added regarding one embodiment of the present disclosure.
[Appendix 1]
a receiver for receiving at least one of downlink control information indicating a plurality of Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) states and a MAC Control Element (MAC CE);
a control unit that controls at least one of downlink reception and uplink transmission based on the plurality of indicated TCI states;
A terminal in which, when the control unit receives information indicating a subset of a plurality of indicated TCI states, the control unit updates some of the indicated TCI states based on the information indicating the subset, and maintains the remaining indicated TCI states.
[Appendix 2]
2. The terminal according to claim 1, wherein the information indicating the subset of the plurality of indicated TCI states is downlink control information having a code point to which the subset of the plurality of indicated TCI states is mapped.
[Appendix 3]
3. The terminal according to claim 1, wherein the information indicating the subset of the plurality of indicated TCI states is a MAC CE that maps the subset of the plurality of indicated TCI states to a code point of a TCI state field included in downlink control information.
[Appendix 4]
4. The terminal according to any one of Supplementary Note 1 to Supplementary Note 3, wherein the information indicating a subset of the plurality of indicated TCI states is a MAC CE that maps one of a TCI state for downlink and a TCI state for uplink to a code point of a TCI state field included in downlink control information.
(無線通信システム)
以下、本開示の一実施形態に係る無線通信システムの構成について説明する。この無線通信システムでは、本開示の上記各実施形態に係る無線通信方法のいずれか又はこれらの組み合わせを用いて通信が行われる。
(wireless communication system)
The configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure will be described below. In this wireless communication system, communication is performed using any one of the wireless communication methods according to the above embodiments of the present disclosure or a combination thereof.
図10は、一実施形態に係る無線通信システムの概略構成の一例を示す図である。無線通信システム1(単にシステム1と呼ばれてもよい)は、Third Generation Partnership Project(3GPP)によって仕様化されるLong Term Evolution(LTE)、5th generation mobile communication system New Radio(5G NR)などを用いて通信を実現するシステムであってもよい。 FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to one embodiment. Wireless communication system 1 (which may simply be referred to as system 1) may be a system that achieves communication using Long Term Evolution (LTE) specified by the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), 5th generation mobile communication system New Radio (5G NR), or the like.
また、無線通信システム1は、複数のRadio Access Technology(RAT)間のデュアルコネクティビティ(マルチRATデュアルコネクティビティ(Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity(MR-DC)))をサポートしてもよい。MR-DCは、LTE(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access(E-UTRA))とNRとのデュアルコネクティビティ(E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity(EN-DC))、NRとLTEとのデュアルコネクティビティ(NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity(NE-DC))などを含んでもよい。 The wireless communication system 1 may also support dual connectivity between multiple Radio Access Technologies (RATs) (Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity (MR-DC)). MR-DC may include dual connectivity between LTE (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and NR (E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC)), dual connectivity between NR and LTE (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity (NE-DC)), etc.
EN-DCでは、LTE(E-UTRA)の基地局(eNB)がマスタノード(Master Node(MN))であり、NRの基地局(gNB)がセカンダリノード(Secondary Node(SN))である。NE-DCでは、NRの基地局(gNB)がMNであり、LTE(E-UTRA)の基地局(eNB)がSNである。 In EN-DC, the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the master node (MN), and the NR base station (gNB) is the secondary node (SN). In NE-DC, the NR base station (gNB) is the MN, and the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the SN.
無線通信システム1は、同一のRAT内の複数の基地局間のデュアルコネクティビティ(例えば、MN及びSNの双方がNRの基地局(gNB)であるデュアルコネクティビティ(NR-NR Dual Connectivity(NN-DC)))をサポートしてもよい。 The wireless communication system 1 may support dual connectivity between multiple base stations within the same RAT (for example, dual connectivity where both the MN and SN are NR base stations (gNBs) (NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NN-DC))).
無線通信システム1は、比較的カバレッジの広いマクロセルC1を形成する基地局11と、マクロセルC1内に配置され、マクロセルC1よりも狭いスモールセルC2を形成する基地局12(12a-12c)と、を備えてもよい。ユーザ端末20は、少なくとも1つのセル内に位置してもよい。各セル及びユーザ端末20の配置、数、形状、大きさなどは、図に示す態様に限定されない。以下、基地局11及び12を区別しない場合は、基地局10と総称する。 The wireless communication system 1 may include a base station 11 that forms a macrocell C1 with relatively wide coverage, and base stations 12 (12a-12c) that are located within the macrocell C1 and form a small cell C2 that is smaller than the macrocell C1. A user terminal 20 may be located within at least one of the cells. The location, number, shape, size, etc. of each cell and user terminal 20 are not limited to the configuration shown in the figure. Hereinafter, when base stations 11 and 12 are not to be distinguished, they will be collectively referred to as base station 10.
なお、無線通信システム1は、Multi Input Multi Output(MIMO)を利用してもよい。例えば、1つのセルは、1つのアンテナ/基地局10によって形成されてもよいし、複数のアンテナ/基地局10によって形成されてもよい。1つの[仮想的な]セル(例えば、スーパーセルと呼ばれてもよい)が、複数の[仮想的な]セル(例えば、サブセルと呼ばれてもよい)によって構成されてもよい。スーパーセルは、物理的な範囲が固定的なセルに該当してもよく、サブセルは、物理的な範囲が準静的/動的に変動するセルに該当してもよい。この場合、無線通信システム1は、セルフリーシステムと呼ばれてもよい。 The wireless communication system 1 may also utilize multi-input multi-output (MIMO). For example, one cell may be formed by one antenna/base station 10, or by multiple antennas/base stations 10. One [virtual] cell (which may be called, for example, a supercell) may be made up of multiple [virtual] cells (which may be called, for example, subcells). A supercell may correspond to a cell with a fixed physical range, and a subcell may correspond to a cell with a quasi-static/dynamically changing physical range. In this case, the wireless communication system 1 may be called a cell-free system.
ユーザ端末20は、複数の基地局10のうち、少なくとも1つに接続してもよい。ユーザ端末20は、複数のコンポーネントキャリア(Component Carrier(CC))を用いたキャリアアグリゲーション(Carrier Aggregation(CA))及びデュアルコネクティビティ(DC)の少なくとも一方を利用してもよい。 The user terminal 20 may be connected to at least one of the multiple base stations 10. The user terminal 20 may use at least one of carrier aggregation (CA) using multiple component carriers (CC) and dual connectivity (DC).
各CCは、第1の周波数帯(Frequency Range 1(FR1))及び第2の周波数帯(Frequency Range 2(FR2))の少なくとも1つに含まれてもよい。マクロセルC1はFR1に含まれてもよいし、スモールセルC2はFR2に含まれてもよい。例えば、FR1は、6GHz以下の周波数帯(サブ6GHz(sub-6GHz))であってもよいし、FR2は、24GHzよりも高い周波数帯(above-24GHz)であってもよい。なお、FR1及びFR2の周波数帯、定義などはこれらに限られず、例えばFR1がFR2よりも高い周波数帯に該当してもよい。 Each CC may be included in at least one of a first frequency band (Frequency Range 1 (FR1)) and a second frequency band (Frequency Range 2 (FR2)). Macrocell C1 may be included in FR1, and small cell C2 may be included in FR2. For example, FR1 may be a frequency band below 6 GHz (sub-6 GHz), and FR2 may be a frequency band above 24 GHz (above-24 GHz). Note that the frequency bands and definitions of FR1 and FR2 are not limited to these, and for example, FR1 may correspond to a higher frequency band than FR2.
また、ユーザ端末20は、各CCにおいて、時分割複信(Time Division Duplex(TDD))及び周波数分割複信(Frequency Division Duplex(FDD))の少なくとも1つを用いて通信を行ってもよい。 Furthermore, the user terminal 20 may communicate using at least one of time division duplex (TDD) and frequency division duplex (FDD) in each CC.
複数の基地局10は、有線(例えば、Common Public Radio Interface(CPRI)に準拠した光ファイバ、X2/Xnインターフェースなど)又は無線(例えば、NR通信)によって接続されてもよい。例えば、基地局11及び12間においてNR通信がバックホールとして利用される場合、上位局に該当する基地局11はIntegrated Access Backhaul(IAB)ドナー、中継局(リレー)に該当する基地局12はIABノードと呼ばれてもよい。 Multiple base stations 10 may be connected by wire (e.g., optical fiber compliant with the Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI), X2/Xn interface, etc.) or wirelessly (e.g., NR communication). For example, if NR communication is used as a backhaul between base stations 11 and 12, base station 11, which corresponds to the upper station, may be called an Integrated Access Backhaul (IAB) donor, and base station 12, which corresponds to the relay station (relay), may be called an IAB node.
基地局10は、他の基地局10を介して、又は直接コアネットワーク30に接続されてもよい。コアネットワーク30は、例えば、Evolved Packet Core(EPC)、5G Core Network(5GCN)、Next Generation Core(NGC)などの少なくとも1つを含んでもよい。 A base station 10 may be connected to the core network 30 directly or via another base station 10. The core network 30 may include, for example, at least one of an Evolved Packet Core (EPC), a 5G Core Network (5GCN), a Next Generation Core (NGC), etc.
コアネットワーク30は、例えば、User Plane Function(UPF)、Access and Mobility management Function(AMF)、Session Management Function(SMF)、Unified Data Management(UDM)、Application Function(AF)、Data Network(DN)、Location Management Function(LMF)、保守運用管理(Operation、Administration and Maintenance(Management)(OAM))などのネットワーク機能(Network Functions(NF))を含んでもよい。なお、1つのネットワークノードによって複数の機能が提供されてもよい。また、DNを介して外部ネットワーク(例えば、インターネット)との通信が行われてもよい。 The core network 30 may include network functions (Network Functions (NF)) such as, for example, a User Plane Function (UPF), an Access and Mobility management Function (AMF), a Session Management Function (SMF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), a Data Network (DN), a Location Management Function (LMF), and Operation, Administration and Maintenance (Management) (OAM). Note that multiple functions may be provided by a single network node. Communication with an external network (e.g., the Internet) may also be performed via the DN.
ユーザ端末20は、LTE、LTE-A、5Gなどの通信方式の少なくとも1つに対応した端末であってもよい。 The user terminal 20 may be a terminal that supports at least one of the communication methods such as LTE, LTE-A, and 5G.
無線通信システム1においては、直交周波数分割多重(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing(OFDM))ベースの無線アクセス方式が利用されてもよい。例えば、下りリンク(Downlink(DL))及び上りリンク(Uplink(UL))の少なくとも一方において、Cyclic Prefix OFDM(CP-OFDM)、Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM(DFT-s-OFDM)、Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access(OFDMA)、Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access(SC-FDMA)などが利用されてもよい。 In the wireless communication system 1, a wireless access method based on Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) may be used. For example, in at least one of the downlink (DL) and uplink (UL), Cyclic Prefix OFDM (CP-OFDM), Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM (DFT-s-OFDM), Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA), Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA), etc. may be used.
無線アクセス方式は、波形(waveform)と呼ばれてもよい。なお、無線通信システム1においては、UL及びDLの無線アクセス方式には、他の無線アクセス方式(例えば、他のシングルキャリア伝送方式、他のマルチキャリア伝送方式)が用いられてもよい。 The radio access method may also be called a waveform. Note that in the wireless communication system 1, other radio access methods (e.g., other single-carrier transmission methods, other multi-carrier transmission methods) may be used as the UL and DL radio access methods.
無線通信システム1では、下りリンクチャネルとして、各ユーザ端末20で共有される下り共有チャネル(Physical Downlink Shared Channel(PDSCH))、ブロードキャストチャネル(Physical Broadcast Channel(PBCH))、下り制御チャネル(Physical Downlink Control Channel(PDCCH))などが用いられてもよい。 In the wireless communication system 1, the downlink channel may be a downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, a broadcast channel (Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH)), a downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)), or the like.
また、無線通信システム1では、上りリンクチャネルとして、各ユーザ端末20で共有される上り共有チャネル(Physical Uplink Shared Channel(PUSCH))、上り制御チャネル(Physical Uplink Control Channel(PUCCH))、ランダムアクセスチャネル(Physical Random Access Channel(PRACH))などが用いられてもよい。 Furthermore, in the wireless communication system 1, an uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, an uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)), a random access channel (Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)), etc. may be used as an uplink channel.
PDSCHによって、ユーザデータ、上位レイヤ制御情報、System Information Block(SIB)などが伝送される。PUSCHによって、ユーザデータ、上位レイヤ制御情報などが伝送されてもよい。また、PBCHによって、Master Information Block(MIB)が伝送されてもよい。 User data, upper layer control information, System Information Block (SIB), etc. are transmitted via PDSCH. User data, upper layer control information, etc. may also be transmitted via PUSCH. Furthermore, Master Information Block (MIB) may also be transmitted via PBCH.
PDCCHによって、下位レイヤ制御情報が伝送されてもよい。下位レイヤ制御情報は、例えば、PDSCH及びPUSCHの少なくとも一方のスケジューリング情報を含む下り制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))を含んでもよい。 Lower layer control information may be transmitted via the PDCCH. The lower layer control information may include, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI) including scheduling information for at least one of the PDSCH and PUSCH.
なお、PDSCHをスケジューリングするDCIは、DLアサインメント、DL DCIなどと呼ばれてもよいし、PUSCHをスケジューリングするDCIは、ULグラント、UL DCIなどと呼ばれてもよい。なお、PDSCHはDLデータで読み替えられてもよいし、PUSCHはULデータで読み替えられてもよい。 Note that the DCI that schedules the PDSCH may be referred to as a DL assignment or DL DCI, and the DCI that schedules the PUSCH may be referred to as a UL grant or UL DCI. Note that the PDSCH may be interpreted as DL data, and the PUSCH may be interpreted as UL data.
PDCCHの検出には、制御リソースセット(COntrol REsource SET(CORESET))及びサーチスペース(search space)が利用されてもよい。CORESETは、DCIをサーチするリソースに対応する。サーチスペースは、PDCCH候補(PDCCH candidates)のサーチ領域及びサーチ方法に対応する。1つのCORESETは、1つ又は複数のサーチスペースに関連付けられてもよい。UEは、サーチスペース設定に基づいて、あるサーチスペースに関連するCORESETをモニタしてもよい。 A control resource set (CORESET) and a search space may be used to detect the PDCCH. The CORESET corresponds to the resources to search for DCI. The search space corresponds to the search area and search method for PDCCH candidates. One CORESET may be associated with one or more search spaces. The UE may monitor the CORESET associated with a certain search space based on the search space configuration.
1つのサーチスペースは、1つ又は複数のアグリゲーションレベル(aggregation Level)に該当するPDCCH候補に対応してもよい。1つ又は複数のサーチスペースは、サーチスペースセットと呼ばれてもよい。なお、本開示の「サーチスペース」、「サーチスペースセット」、「サーチスペース設定」、「サーチスペースセット設定」、「CORESET」、「CORESET設定」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 One search space may correspond to PDCCH candidates corresponding to one or more aggregation levels. One or more search spaces may be referred to as a search space set. Note that in this disclosure, "search space," "search space set," "search space setting," "search space set setting," "CORESET," "CORESET setting," etc. may be read interchangeably.
PUCCHによって、チャネル状態情報(Channel State Information(CSI))、送達確認情報(例えば、Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement(HARQ-ACK)、ACK/NACKなどと呼ばれてもよい)及びスケジューリングリクエスト(Scheduling Request(SR))の少なくとも1つを含む上り制御情報(Uplink Control Information(UCI))が伝送されてもよい。PRACHによって、セルとの接続確立のためのランダムアクセスプリアンブルが伝送されてもよい。 The PUCCH may transmit uplink control information (UCI) including at least one of channel state information (CSI), delivery confirmation information (which may be called, for example, Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement (HARQ-ACK), ACK/NACK, etc.), and scheduling request (SR). The PRACH may transmit a random access preamble for establishing a connection with a cell.
なお、本開示において下りリンク、上りリンクなどは「リンク」を付けずに表現されてもよい。また、各種チャネルの先頭に「物理(Physical)」を付けずに表現されてもよい。 Note that in this disclosure, downlink, uplink, etc. may be expressed without the word "link." Also, various channels may be expressed without the word "Physical" at the beginning.
無線通信システム1では、同期信号(Synchronization Signal(SS))、下りリンク参照信号(Downlink Reference Signal(DL-RS))などが伝送されてもよい。無線通信システム1では、DL-RSとして、セル固有参照信号(Cell-specific Reference Signal(CRS))、チャネル状態情報参照信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal(CSI-RS))、復調用参照信号(DeModulation Reference Signal(DMRS))、位置決定参照信号(Positioning Reference Signal(PRS))、位相トラッキング参照信号(Phase Tracking Reference Signal(PTRS))などが伝送されてもよい。 In the wireless communication system 1, a synchronization signal (SS), a downlink reference signal (DL-RS), etc. may be transmitted. In the wireless communication system 1, as the DL-RS, a cell-specific reference signal (CRS), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), a positioning reference signal (PRS), a phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), etc. may be transmitted.
同期信号は、例えば、プライマリ同期信号(Primary Synchronization Signal(PSS))及びセカンダリ同期信号(Secondary Synchronization Signal(SSS))の少なくとも1つであってもよい。SS(PSS、SSS)及びPBCH(及びPBCH用のDMRS)を含む信号ブロックは、SS/PBCHブロック、SS Block(SSB)などと呼ばれてもよい。なお、SS、SSBなども、参照信号と呼ばれてもよい。 The synchronization signal may be, for example, at least one of a primary synchronization signal (PSS) and a secondary synchronization signal (SSS). A signal block including an SS (PSS, SSS) and a PBCH (and a DMRS for the PBCH) may be referred to as an SS/PBCH block, an SS block (SSB), etc. Note that SS, SSB, etc. may also be referred to as a reference signal.
また、無線通信システム1では、上りリンク参照信号(Uplink Reference Signal(UL-RS))として、測定用参照信号(Sounding Reference Signal(SRS))、復調用参照信号(DMRS)などが伝送されてもよい。なお、DMRSはユーザ端末固有参照信号(UE-specific Reference Signal)と呼ばれてもよい。 Furthermore, in the wireless communication system 1, a sounding reference signal (SRS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), etc. may be transmitted as an uplink reference signal (UL-RS). DMRS may also be called a user equipment-specific reference signal (UE-specific Reference Signal).
(基地局)
図11は、一実施形態に係る基地局の構成の一例を示す図である。基地局10は、制御部110、送受信部120、送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース(transmission line interface)140を備えている。なお、制御部110、送受信部120及び送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース140は、それぞれ1つ以上が備えられてもよい。
(base station)
11 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a base station according to an embodiment. The base station 10 includes a control unit 110, a transceiver unit 120, a transceiver antenna 130, and a transmission line interface 140. Note that the base station may include one or more of each of the control unit 110, the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission line interface 140.
なお、本例では、本実施の形態における特徴部分の機能ブロックを主に示しており、基地局10は、無線通信に必要な他の機能ブロックも有すると想定されてもよい。以下で説明する各部の処理の一部は、省略されてもよい。 Note that this example mainly shows the functional blocks that characterize the present embodiment, and it may be assumed that the base station 10 also has other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each unit described below may be omitted.
制御部110は、基地局10全体の制御を実施する。制御部110は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるコントローラ、制御回路などから構成することができる。 The control unit 110 controls the entire base station 10. The control unit 110 can be composed of a controller, control circuit, etc., as described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.
制御部110は、信号の生成、スケジューリング(例えば、リソース割り当て、マッピング)などを制御してもよい。制御部110は、送受信部120、送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース140を用いた送受信、測定などを制御してもよい。制御部110は、信号として送信するデータ、制御情報、系列(sequence)などを生成し、送受信部120に転送してもよい。制御部110は、通信チャネルの呼処理(設定、解放など)、基地局10の状態管理、無線リソースの管理などを行ってもよい。 The control unit 110 may control signal generation, scheduling (e.g., resource allocation, mapping), etc. The control unit 110 may also control transmission and reception using the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140, measurements, etc. The control unit 110 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals, and transfer them to the transceiver unit 120. The control unit 110 may also perform call processing of communication channels (setting up, releasing, etc.), status management of the base station 10, management of radio resources, etc.
送受信部120は、ベースバンド(baseband)部121、Radio Frequency(RF)部122、測定部123を含んでもよい。ベースバンド部121は、送信処理部1211及び受信処理部1212を含んでもよい。送受信部120は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるトランスミッター/レシーバー、RF回路、ベースバンド回路、フィルタ、位相シフタ(phase shifter)、測定回路、送受信回路などから構成することができる。 The transceiver unit 120 may include a baseband unit 121, a radio frequency (RF) unit 122, and a measurement unit 123. The baseband unit 121 may include a transmission processing unit 1211 and a reception processing unit 1212. The transceiver unit 120 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure relates.
送受信部120は、一体の送受信部として構成されてもよいし、送信部及び受信部から構成されてもよい。当該送信部は、送信処理部1211、RF部122から構成されてもよい。当該受信部は、受信処理部1212、RF部122、測定部123から構成されてもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 may be configured as an integrated transceiver unit, or may be composed of a transmitter unit and a receiver unit. The transmitter unit may be composed of a transmission processing unit 1211 and an RF unit 122. The receiver unit may be composed of a reception processing unit 1212, an RF unit 122, and a measurement unit 123.
送受信アンテナ130は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるアンテナ、例えばアレイアンテナなどから構成することができる。 The transmitting and receiving antenna 130 can be composed of an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.
送受信部120は、上述の下りリンクチャネル、同期信号、下りリンク参照信号などを送信してもよい。送受信部120は、上述の上りリンクチャネル、上りリンク参照信号などを受信してもよい。 The transceiver 120 may transmit the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc. The transceiver 120 may also receive the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.
送受信部120は、デジタルビームフォーミング(例えば、プリコーディング)、アナログビームフォーミング(例えば、位相回転)などを用いて、送信ビーム及び受信ビームの少なくとも一方を形成してもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 may form at least one of the transmit beam and the receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.
送受信部120(送信処理部1211)は、例えば制御部110から取得したデータ、制御情報などに対して、Packet Data Convergence Protocol(PDCP)レイヤの処理、Radio Link Control(RLC)レイヤの処理(例えば、RLC再送制御)、Medium Access Control(MAC)レイヤの処理(例えば、HARQ再送制御)などを行い、送信するビット列を生成してもよい。 The transceiver 120 (transmission processing unit 1211) may perform Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer processing, Radio Link Control (RLC) layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), Medium Access Control (MAC) layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on data, control information, etc. obtained from the control unit 110, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.
送受信部120(送信処理部1211)は、送信するビット列に対して、チャネル符号化(誤り訂正符号化を含んでもよい)、変調、マッピング、フィルタ処理、離散フーリエ変換(Discrete Fourier Transform(DFT))処理(必要に応じて)、逆高速フーリエ変換(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform(IFFT))処理、プリコーディング、デジタル-アナログ変換などの送信処理を行い、ベースバンド信号を出力してもよい。 The transmitter/receiver unit 120 (transmission processing unit 1211) may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) processing (if necessary), Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
送受信部120(RF部122)は、ベースバンド信号に対して、無線周波数帯への変調、フィルタ処理、増幅などを行い、無線周波数帯の信号を、送受信アンテナ130を介して送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 (RF unit 122) may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc. on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 130.
一方、送受信部120(RF部122)は、送受信アンテナ130によって受信された無線周波数帯の信号に対して、増幅、フィルタ処理、ベースバンド信号への復調などを行ってもよい。 On the other hand, the transceiver unit 120 (RF unit 122) may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 130.
送受信部120(受信処理部1212)は、取得されたベースバンド信号に対して、アナログ-デジタル変換、高速フーリエ変換(Fast Fourier Transform(FFT))処理、逆離散フーリエ変換(Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform(IDFT))処理(必要に応じて)、フィルタ処理、デマッピング、復調、復号(誤り訂正復号を含んでもよい)、MACレイヤ処理、RLCレイヤの処理及びPDCPレイヤの処理などの受信処理を適用し、ユーザデータなどを取得してもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 (reception processing unit 1212) may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processing, Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal, thereby acquiring user data, etc.
送受信部120(測定部123)は、受信した信号に関する測定を実施してもよい。例えば、測定部123は、受信した信号に基づいて、Radio Resource Management(RRM)測定、Channel State Information(CSI)測定などを行ってもよい。測定部123は、受信電力(例えば、Reference Signal Received Power(RSRP))、受信品質(例えば、Reference Signal Received Quality(RSRQ)、Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio(SINR)、Signal to Noise Ratio(SNR))、信号強度(例えば、Received Signal Strength Indicator(RSSI))、伝搬路情報(例えば、CSI)などについて測定してもよい。測定結果は、制御部110に出力されてもよい。 The transceiver 120 (measurement unit 123) may perform measurements on the received signal. For example, the measurement unit 123 may perform Radio Resource Management (RRM) measurements, Channel State Information (CSI) measurements, etc. based on the received signal. The measurement unit 123 may measure received power (e.g., Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP)), received quality (e.g., Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ), Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR), Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR)), signal strength (e.g., Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc. The measurement results may be output to the control unit 110.
伝送路インターフェース140は、コアネットワーク30に含まれる装置(例えば、NFを提供するネットワークノード)、他の基地局10などとの間で信号を送受信(バックホールシグナリング)し、ユーザ端末20のためのユーザデータ(ユーザプレーンデータ)、制御プレーンデータなどを取得、伝送などしてもよい。 The transmission path interface 140 may transmit and receive signals (backhaul signaling) between devices included in the core network 30 (e.g., network nodes providing NF), other base stations 10, etc., and may acquire and transmit user data (user plane data), control plane data, etc. for the user terminal 20.
なお、本開示における基地局10の送信部及び受信部は、送受信部120、送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース140の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。 Note that the transmitter and receiver of the base station 10 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitter/receiver 120, the transmitter/receiver antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140.
なお、基地局10は、無線ユニット(Radio Unit(RU))、分散ユニット(Distributed Unit(DU))及び中央ユニット(Central Unit(CU))の3つの要素に分離されてもよい。例えば、RUは、RF処理(デジタルビームフォーミング、デジタル-アナログ変換、アナログビームフォーミングなど)及び物理レイヤの下位機能(プリコーディング、IFFT、FFTなど)を実現してもよい。DUは、物理レイヤの上位機能(符号化からリソースエレメントマッピングなど)、MACレイヤの機能及びRLCレイヤの機能を実現してもよい。CUは、PDCPレイヤ、Service Data Adaptation Protocol(SDAP)レイヤ及びRRCレイヤの機能を実現してもよい。 The base station 10 may be separated into three elements: a radio unit (RU), a distributed unit (DU), and a central unit (CU). For example, the RU may perform RF processing (digital beamforming, digital-to-analog conversion, analog beamforming, etc.) and lower-level physical layer functions (precoding, IFFT, FFT, etc.). The DU may perform higher-level physical layer functions (encoding to resource element mapping, etc.), MAC layer functions, and RLC layer functions. The CU may perform PDCP layer, Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) layer, and RRC layer functions.
本開示において、基地局10は、RU、DU及びCUの機能を全て実現する1つの装置を含んでもよいし、RU、DU及びCUの機能のうち一部の機能をそれぞれが実現し、互いに接続される複数の装置を含んでもよい。本開示において、基地局10は、RU/DU/CUと互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, the base station 10 may include a single device that implements all of the functions of the RU, DU, and CU, or may include multiple devices that each implement some of the functions of the RU, DU, and CU and are connected to each other. In the present disclosure, the base station 10 may be interchangeably referred to as the RU/DU/CU.
送受信部120は、複数の指示Transmission Configuration Indication(TCI)状態を指示する下り制御情報及びMAC制御要素(MAC Control Element(MAC CE))の少なくとも一つを送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 may transmit at least one of downlink control information and MAC control elements (MAC CEs) indicating multiple Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) states.
制御部110は、複数の指示TCI状態に基づいて下りリンク受信及び上りリンク送信の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。制御部110は、複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを示す情報を送信した場合、複数の指示TCI状態の一部の指示TCI状態を更新し、残りの指示TCI状態を維持するように制御してもよい。 The control unit 110 may control at least one of downlink reception and uplink transmission based on the multiple indicated TCI states. When the control unit 110 transmits information indicating a subset of the multiple indicated TCI states, the control unit 110 may update some of the multiple indicated TCI states and maintain the remaining indicated TCI states.
(ユーザ端末)
図12は、一実施形態に係るユーザ端末の構成の一例を示す図である。ユーザ端末20は、制御部210、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230を備えている。なお、制御部210、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230は、それぞれ1つ以上が備えられてもよい。
(user terminal)
12 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to one embodiment. The user terminal 20 includes a control unit 210, a transceiver unit 220, and a transceiver antenna 230. Note that the user terminal 20 may include one or more of each of the control unit 210, the transceiver unit 220, and the transceiver antenna 230.
なお、本例では、本実施の形態における特徴部分の機能ブロックを主に示しており、ユーザ端末20は、無線通信に必要な他の機能ブロックも有すると想定されてもよい。以下で説明する各部の処理の一部は、省略されてもよい。 Note that this example mainly shows the functional blocks that characterize the present embodiment, and the user terminal 20 may also have other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each unit described below may be omitted.
制御部210は、ユーザ端末20全体の制御を実施する。制御部210は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるコントローラ、制御回路などから構成することができる。 The control unit 210 controls the entire user terminal 20. The control unit 210 can be composed of a controller, a control circuit, etc., as described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.
制御部210は、信号の生成、マッピングなどを制御してもよい。制御部210は、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230を用いた送受信、測定などを制御してもよい。制御部210は、信号として送信するデータ、制御情報、系列などを生成し、送受信部220に転送してもよい。 The control unit 210 may control signal generation, mapping, etc. The control unit 210 may also control transmission and reception, measurement, etc. using the transmission and reception unit 220 and the transmission and reception antenna 230. The control unit 210 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals and transfer them to the transmission and reception unit 220.
送受信部220は、ベースバンド部221、RF部222、測定部223を含んでもよい。ベースバンド部221は、送信処理部2211、受信処理部2212を含んでもよい。送受信部220は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるトランスミッター/レシーバー、RF回路、ベースバンド回路、フィルタ、位相シフタ、測定回路、送受信回路などから構成することができる。 The transceiver unit 220 may include a baseband unit 221, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223. The baseband unit 221 may include a transmission processing unit 2211 and a reception processing unit 2212. The transceiver unit 220 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on common understanding in the technical field related to this disclosure.
送受信部220は、一体の送受信部として構成されてもよいし、送信部及び受信部から構成されてもよい。当該送信部は、送信処理部2211、RF部222から構成されてもよい。当該受信部は、受信処理部2212、RF部222、測定部223から構成されてもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 may be configured as an integrated transceiver unit, or may be composed of a transmitter unit and a receiver unit. The transmitter unit may be composed of a transmission processing unit 2211 and an RF unit 222. The receiver unit may be composed of a reception processing unit 2212, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223.
送受信アンテナ230は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるアンテナ、例えばアレイアンテナなどから構成することができる。 The transmitting and receiving antenna 230 can be configured as an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.
送受信部220は、上述の下りリンクチャネル、同期信号、下りリンク参照信号などを受信してもよい。送受信部220は、上述の上りリンクチャネル、上りリンク参照信号などを送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 may receive the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc. The transceiver unit 220 may also transmit the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.
送受信部220は、デジタルビームフォーミング(例えば、プリコーディング)、アナログビームフォーミング(例えば、位相回転)などを用いて、送信ビーム及び受信ビームの少なくとも一方を形成してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 may form at least one of the transmit beam and the receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.
送受信部220(送信処理部2211)は、例えば制御部210から取得したデータ、制御情報などに対して、PDCPレイヤの処理、RLCレイヤの処理(例えば、RLC再送制御)、MACレイヤの処理(例えば、HARQ再送制御)などを行い、送信するビット列を生成してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 (transmission processing unit 2211) may perform PDCP layer processing, RLC layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), MAC layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on data, control information, etc. obtained from the control unit 210, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.
送受信部220(送信処理部2211)は、送信するビット列に対して、チャネル符号化(誤り訂正符号化を含んでもよい)、変調、マッピング、フィルタ処理、DFT処理(必要に応じて)、IFFT処理、プリコーディング、デジタル-アナログ変換などの送信処理を行い、ベースバンド信号を出力してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 (transmission processing unit 2211) may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, DFT processing (if necessary), IFFT processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
なお、DFT処理を適用するか否かは、トランスフォームプリコーディングの設定に基づいてもよい。送受信部220(送信処理部2211)は、あるチャネル(例えば、PUSCH)について、トランスフォームプリコーディングが有効(enabled)である場合、当該チャネルをDFT-s-OFDM波形を用いて送信するために上記送信処理としてDFT処理を行ってもよいし、そうでない場合、上記送信処理としてDFT処理を行わなくてもよい。 Whether or not to apply DFT processing may be based on the settings for transform precoding. If transform precoding is enabled for a certain channel (e.g., PUSCH), the transceiver unit 220 (transmission processing unit 2211) may perform DFT processing as the transmission processing to transmit the channel using a DFT-s-OFDM waveform; if not, it may not be necessary to perform DFT processing as the transmission processing.
送受信部220(RF部222)は、ベースバンド信号に対して、無線周波数帯への変調、フィルタ処理、増幅などを行い、無線周波数帯の信号を、送受信アンテナ230を介して送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 (RF unit 222) may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc. on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 230.
一方、送受信部220(RF部222)は、送受信アンテナ230によって受信された無線周波数帯の信号に対して、増幅、フィルタ処理、ベースバンド信号への復調などを行ってもよい。 On the other hand, the transceiver unit 220 (RF unit 222) may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 230.
送受信部220(受信処理部2212)は、取得されたベースバンド信号に対して、アナログ-デジタル変換、FFT処理、IDFT処理(必要に応じて)、フィルタ処理、デマッピング、復調、復号(誤り訂正復号を含んでもよい)、MACレイヤ処理、RLCレイヤの処理及びPDCPレイヤの処理などの受信処理を適用し、ユーザデータなどを取得してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 (reception processing unit 2212) may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, FFT processing, IDFT processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal to acquire user data, etc.
送受信部220(測定部223)は、受信した信号に関する測定を実施してもよい。例えば、測定部223は、受信した信号に基づいて、RRM測定、CSI測定などを行ってもよい。測定部223は、受信電力(例えば、RSRP)、受信品質(例えば、RSRQ、SINR、SNR)、信号強度(例えば、RSSI)、伝搬路情報(例えば、CSI)などについて測定してもよい。測定結果は、制御部210に出力されてもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 (measurement unit 223) may perform measurements on the received signal. For example, the measurement unit 223 may perform RRM measurements, CSI measurements, etc. based on the received signal. The measurement unit 223 may measure received power (e.g., RSRP), received quality (e.g., RSRQ, SINR, SNR), signal strength (e.g., RSSI), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc. The measurement results may be output to the control unit 210.
なお、測定部223は、チャネル測定用リソースに基づいて、CSI算出のためのチャネル測定を導出してもよい。チャネル測定用リソースは、例えば、ノンゼロパワー(Non Zero Power(NZP))CSI-RSリソースであってもよい。また、測定部223は、干渉測定用リソースに基づいて、CSI算出のための干渉測定を導出してもよい。干渉測定用リソースは、干渉測定用のNZP CSI-RSリソース、CSI-干渉測定(Interference Measurement(IM))リソースなどの少なくとも1つであってもよい。なお、CSI-IMは、CSI-干渉管理(Interference Management(IM))と呼ばれてもよいし、ゼロパワー(Zero Power(ZP))CSI-RSと互いに読み替えられてもよい。なお、本開示において、CSI-RS、NZP CSI-RS、ZP CSI-RS、CSI-IM、CSI-SSBなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 The measurement unit 223 may derive channel measurements for CSI calculation based on channel measurement resources. The channel measurement resources may be, for example, non-zero power (NZP) CSI-RS resources. The measurement unit 223 may also derive interference measurements for CSI calculation based on interference measurement resources. The interference measurement resources may be at least one of NZP CSI-RS resources for interference measurement, CSI-Interference Measurement (IM) resources, etc. CSI-IM may also be referred to as CSI-Interference Management (IM) or may be interchangeably read as Zero Power (ZP) CSI-RS. In this disclosure, CSI-RS, NZP CSI-RS, ZP CSI-RS, CSI-IM, CSI-SSB, etc. may be interchangeable.
なお、本開示におけるユーザ端末20の送信部及び受信部は、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。 Note that the transmitter and receiver of the user terminal 20 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitter/receiver 220 and the transmitter/receiver antenna 230.
送受信部220は、複数の指示Transmission Configuration Indication(TCI)状態を指示する下り制御情報及びMAC制御要素(MAC Control Element(MAC CE))の少なくとも一つを受信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 may receive at least one of downlink control information and MAC control elements (MAC CEs) indicating multiple Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) states.
制御部210は、複数の指示TCI状態に基づいて下りリンク受信及び上りリンク送信の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。制御部210は、複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを示す情報を受信した場合、サブセットを示す情報に基づいて、複数の指示TCI状態の一部の指示TCI状態を更新し、残りの指示TCI状態を維持するように制御してもよい。 The control unit 210 may control at least one of downlink reception and uplink transmission based on the multiple indicated TCI states. When the control unit 210 receives information indicating a subset of the multiple indicated TCI states, the control unit 210 may update some of the indicated TCI states based on the information indicating the subset, and may control the remaining indicated TCI states to be maintained.
複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを示す情報は、複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットがマッピングされたコードポイントを有する下り制御情報であってもよい。 The information indicating a subset of the multiple indicated TCI states may be downlink control information having a code point to which the subset of the multiple indicated TCI states is mapped.
複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを示す情報は、複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを下り制御情報に含まれるTCI状態フィールドのコードポイントにマッピングするMAC CEであってもよい。 The information indicating a subset of the multiple indicated TCI states may be a MAC CE that maps the subset of the multiple indicated TCI states to a code point in the TCI state field included in the downlink control information.
複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを示す情報は、下りリンク用のTCI状態及び上りリンク用のTCI状態の一方を下り制御情報に含まれるTCI状態フィールドのコードポイントにマッピングするMAC CEであってもよい。 The information indicating a subset of multiple indicated TCI states may be a MAC CE that maps one of the downlink TCI state and the uplink TCI state to a code point in the TCI state field included in the downlink control information.
(ハードウェア構成)
なお、上記実施形態の説明に用いたブロック図は、機能単位のブロックを示している。これらの機能ブロック(構成部)は、ハードウェア及びソフトウェアの少なくとも一方の任意の組み合わせによって実現される。また、各機能ブロックの実現方法は特に限定されない。すなわち、各機能ブロックは、物理的又は論理的に結合した1つの装置を用いて実現されてもよいし、物理的又は論理的に分離した2つ以上の装置を直接的又は間接的に(例えば、有線、無線などを用いて)接続し、これら複数の装置を用いて実現されてもよい。機能ブロックは、上記1つの装置又は上記複数の装置にソフトウェアを組み合わせて実現されてもよい。
(Hardware configuration)
The block diagrams used to explain the above embodiments show functional blocks. These functional blocks (components) are realized by any combination of hardware and/or software. Furthermore, the method for realizing each functional block is not particularly limited. That is, each functional block may be realized using a single device that is physically or logically coupled, or may be realized using two or more physically or logically separated devices that are directly or indirectly connected (e.g., wired, wireless, etc.) and these multiple devices. The functional block may also be realized by combining software with the single device or multiple devices.
ここで、機能には、判断、決定、判定、計算、算出、処理、導出、調査、探索、確認、受信、送信、出力、アクセス、解決、選択、選定、確立、比較、想定、期待、みなし、報知(broadcasting)、通知(notifying)、通信(communicating)、転送(forwarding)、構成(configuring)、再構成(reconfiguring)、割り当て(allocating、mapping)、割り振り(assigning)などがあるが、これらに限られない。例えば、送信を機能させる機能ブロック(構成部)は、送信部(transmitting unit)、送信機(transmitter)などと呼称されてもよい。いずれも、上述したとおり、実現方法は特に限定されない。 Here, functions include, but are not limited to, judgment, determination, judgment, calculation, computation, processing, derivation, investigation, search, confirmation, reception, transmission, output, access, resolution, selection, election, establishment, comparison, assumption, expectation, deeming, broadcasting, notifying, communicating, forwarding, configuring, reconfiguring, allocating, mapping, and assignment. For example, a functional block (component) that performs transmission functions may be called a transmitting unit, transmitter, etc. As mentioned above, there are no particular limitations on how these functions are implemented.
例えば、本開示の一実施形態における基地局、ユーザ端末などは、本開示の無線通信方法の処理を行うコンピュータとして機能してもよい。図13は、一実施形態に係る基地局及びユーザ端末のハードウェア構成の一例を示す図である。上述の基地局10及びユーザ端末20は、物理的には、プロセッサ1001、メモリ1002、ストレージ1003、通信装置1004、入力装置1005、出力装置1006、バス1007などを含むコンピュータ装置として構成されてもよい。 For example, a base station, a user terminal, etc. in one embodiment of the present disclosure may function as a computer that performs processing of the wireless communication method of the present disclosure. Figure 13 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to one embodiment. The above-mentioned base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be physically configured as a computer device including a processor 1001, memory 1002, storage 1003, a communication device 1004, an input device 1005, an output device 1006, a bus 1007, etc.
なお、本開示において、装置、回路、デバイス、部(section)、ユニットなどの文言は、互いに読み替えることができる。基地局10及びユーザ端末20のハードウェア構成は、図に示した各装置を1つ又は複数含むように構成されてもよいし、一部の装置を含まずに構成されてもよい。 In this disclosure, terms such as apparatus, circuit, device, section, and unit may be used interchangeably. The hardware configuration of the base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be configured to include one or more of the devices shown in the figures, or may be configured to exclude some of the devices.
例えば、プロセッサ1001は1つだけ図示されているが、複数のプロセッサがあってもよい。また、処理は、1のプロセッサによって実行されてもよいし、処理が同時に、逐次に、又はその他の手法を用いて、2以上のプロセッサによって実行されてもよい。なお、プロセッサ1001は、1以上のチップによって実装されてもよい。 For example, although only one processor 1001 is shown, there may be multiple processors. Furthermore, processing may be performed by a single processor, or processing may be performed by two or more processors simultaneously, sequentially, or using other techniques. Furthermore, the processor 1001 may be implemented by one or more chips.
基地局10及びユーザ端末20における各機能は、例えば、プロセッサ1001、メモリ1002などのハードウェア上に所定のソフトウェア(プログラム)を読み込ませることによって、プロセッサ1001が演算を行い、通信装置1004を介する通信を制御したり、メモリ1002及びストレージ1003におけるデータの読み出し及び書き込みの少なくとも一方を制御したりすることによって実現される。 The functions of the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 are realized, for example, by loading specific software (programs) onto hardware such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002, causing the processor 1001 to perform calculations, control communications via the communication device 1004, and control at least one of reading and writing data from and to the memory 1002 and storage 1003.
プロセッサ1001は、例えば、オペレーティングシステムを動作させてコンピュータ全体を制御する。プロセッサ1001は、周辺装置とのインターフェース、制御装置、演算装置、レジスタなどを含む中央処理装置(Central Processing Unit(CPU))によって構成されてもよい。例えば、上述の制御部110(210)、送受信部120(220)などの少なくとも一部は、プロセッサ1001によって実現されてもよい。 The processor 1001, for example, runs an operating system to control the entire computer. The processor 1001 may be configured as a central processing unit (CPU) that includes an interface with peripheral devices, a control unit, an arithmetic unit, registers, etc. For example, at least a portion of the above-mentioned control unit 110 (210), transceiver unit 120 (220), etc. may be realized by the processor 1001.
また、プロセッサ1001は、プログラム(プログラムコード)、ソフトウェアモジュール、データなどを、ストレージ1003及び通信装置1004の少なくとも一方からメモリ1002に読み出し、これらに従って各種の処理を実行する。プログラムとしては、上述の実施形態において説明した動作の少なくとも一部をコンピュータに実行させるプログラムが用いられる。例えば、制御部110(210)は、メモリ1002に格納され、プロセッサ1001において動作する制御プログラムによって実現されてもよく、他の機能ブロックについても同様に実現されてもよい。 In addition, the processor 1001 reads programs (program code), software modules, data, etc. from at least one of the storage 1003 and the communication device 1004 into the memory 1002, and executes various processes in accordance with these. The programs used are those that cause a computer to execute at least some of the operations described in the above-described embodiments. For example, the control unit 110 (210) may be implemented by a control program stored in the memory 1002 and running on the processor 1001, and similar implementations may be used for other functional blocks.
メモリ1002は、コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体であり、例えば、Read Only Memory(ROM)、Erasable Programmable ROM(EPROM)、Electrically EPROM(EEPROM)、Random Access Memory(RAM)、その他の適切な記憶媒体の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。メモリ1002は、レジスタ、キャッシュ、メインメモリ(主記憶装置)などと呼ばれてもよい。メモリ1002は、本開示の一実施形態に係る無線通信方法を実施するために実行可能なプログラム(プログラムコード)、ソフトウェアモジュールなどを保存することができる。 Memory 1002 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of, for example, at least one of Read Only Memory (ROM), Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), Electrically EPROM (EEPROM), Random Access Memory (RAM), or other suitable storage medium. Memory 1002 may also be referred to as a register, cache, main memory, etc. Memory 1002 can store executable programs (program code), software modules, etc. for implementing a wireless communication method according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
ストレージ1003は、コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体であり、例えば、フレキシブルディスク、フロッピー(登録商標)ディスク、光磁気ディスク(例えば、コンパクトディスク(Compact Disc ROM(CD-ROM)など)、デジタル多用途ディスク、Blu-ray(登録商標)ディスク)、リムーバブルディスク、ハードディスクドライブ、スマートカード、フラッシュメモリデバイス(例えば、カード、スティック、キードライブ)、磁気ストライプ、データベース、サーバ、その他の適切な記憶媒体の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。ストレージ1003は、補助記憶装置と呼ばれてもよい。 Storage 1003 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of at least one of a flexible disk, a floppy disk, a magneto-optical disk (e.g., a compact disc (Compact Disc ROM (CD-ROM)), a digital versatile disc, a Blu-ray disc), a removable disk, a hard disk drive, a smart card, a flash memory device (e.g., a card, a stick, a key drive), a magnetic stripe, a database, a server, or other suitable storage medium. Storage 1003 may also be referred to as an auxiliary storage device.
通信装置1004は、有線ネットワーク及び無線ネットワークの少なくとも一方を介してコンピュータ間の通信を行うためのハードウェア(送受信デバイス)であり、例えばネットワークデバイス、ネットワークコントローラ、ネットワークカード、通信モジュールなどともいう。通信装置1004は、例えば周波数分割複信(Frequency Division Duplex(FDD))及び時分割複信(Time Division Duplex(TDD))の少なくとも一方を実現するために、高周波スイッチ、デュプレクサ、フィルタ、周波数シンセサイザなどを含んで構成されてもよい。例えば、上述の送受信部120(220)、送受信アンテナ130(230)などは、通信装置1004によって実現されてもよい。送受信部120(220)は、送信部120a(220a)と受信部120b(220b)とで、物理的に又は論理的に分離された実装がなされてもよい。 The communication device 1004 is hardware (transmitting/receiving device) for communicating between computers via at least one of a wired network and a wireless network, and is also referred to as a network device, network controller, network card, or communication module. The communication device 1004 may be configured to include high-frequency switches, duplexers, filters, frequency synthesizers, etc. to implement at least one of frequency division duplex (FDD) and time division duplex (TDD). For example, the above-mentioned transmitter/receiver unit 120 (220), transmitter/receiver antenna 130 (230), etc. may be implemented by the communication device 1004. The transmitter/receiver unit 120 (220) may be implemented as a transmitter unit 120a (220a) and a receiver unit 120b (220b) that are physically or logically separated.
入力装置1005は、外部からの入力を受け付ける入力デバイス(例えば、キーボード、マウス、マイクロフォン、スイッチ、ボタン、センサなど)である。出力装置1006は、外部への出力を実施する出力デバイス(例えば、ディスプレイ、スピーカー、Light Emitting Diode(LED)ランプなど)である。なお、入力装置1005及び出力装置1006は、一体となった構成(例えば、タッチパネル)であってもよい。 The input device 1005 is an input device (e.g., a keyboard, mouse, microphone, switch, button, sensor, etc.) that accepts input from the outside. The output device 1006 is an output device (e.g., a display, speaker, Light Emitting Diode (LED) lamp, etc.) that outputs to the outside. Note that the input device 1005 and the output device 1006 may be integrated into one device (e.g., a touch panel).
また、プロセッサ1001、メモリ1002などの各装置は、情報を通信するためのバス1007によって接続される。バス1007は、単一のバスを用いて構成されてもよいし、装置間ごとに異なるバスを用いて構成されてもよい。 Furthermore, each device, such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002, is connected by a bus 1007 for communicating information. The bus 1007 may be configured using a single bus, or may be configured using different buses between each device.
また、基地局10及びユーザ端末20は、マイクロプロセッサ、デジタル信号プロセッサ(Digital Signal Processor(DSP))、Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC)、Programmable Logic Device(PLD)、Field Programmable Gate Array(FPGA)などのハードウェアを含んで構成されてもよく、当該ハードウェアを用いて各機能ブロックの一部又は全てが実現されてもよい。例えば、プロセッサ1001は、これらのハードウェアの少なくとも1つを用いて実装されてもよい。 Furthermore, the base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be configured to include hardware such as a microprocessor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a field programmable gate array (FPGA), and some or all of the functional blocks may be realized using this hardware. For example, the processor 1001 may be implemented using at least one of these pieces of hardware.
なお、コアネットワーク30に含まれる装置(例えば、NFを提供するネットワークノード)も、上述の機能ブロック/ハードウェア構成によって実現されてもよい。 In addition, devices included in the core network 30 (e.g., network nodes that provide NF) may also be realized using the above-mentioned functional block/hardware configuration.
(変形例)
なお、本開示において説明した用語及び本開示の理解に必要な用語については、同一の又は類似する意味を有する用語と置き換えてもよい。例えば、チャネル、シンボル及び信号(シグナル又はシグナリング)は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、信号はメッセージであってもよい。参照信号(reference signal)は、RSと略称することもでき、適用される標準によってパイロット(Pilot)、パイロット信号などと呼ばれてもよい。また、コンポーネントキャリア(Component Carrier(CC))は、セル、周波数キャリア、キャリア周波数などと呼ばれてもよい。
(Modification)
Note that terms described in the present disclosure and terms necessary for understanding the present disclosure may be replaced with terms having the same or similar meanings. For example, a channel, a symbol, and a signal (signal or signaling) may be interchangeable. A signal may also be a message. A reference signal may be abbreviated as RS, and may also be called a pilot, pilot signal, etc. depending on the applicable standard. A component carrier (CC) may also be called a cell, frequency carrier, carrier frequency, etc.
無線フレームは、時間領域において1つ又は複数の期間(フレーム)によって構成されてもよい。無線フレームを構成する当該1つ又は複数の各期間(フレーム)は、サブフレームと呼ばれてもよい。さらに、サブフレームは、時間領域において1つ又は複数のスロットによって構成されてもよい。サブフレームは、ニューメロロジー(numerology)に依存しない固定の時間長(例えば、1ms)であってもよい。 A radio frame may be composed of one or more periods (frames) in the time domain. Each of the one or more periods (frames) constituting a radio frame may be called a subframe. Furthermore, a subframe may be composed of one or more slots in the time domain. A subframe may have a fixed time length (e.g., 1 ms) that is independent of numerology.
ここで、ニューメロロジーは、ある信号又はチャネルの送信及び受信の少なくとも一方に適用される通信パラメータであってもよい。ニューメロロジーは、例えば、サブキャリア間隔(SubCarrier Spacing(SCS))、帯域幅、シンボル長、サイクリックプレフィックス長、送信時間間隔(Transmission Time Interval(TTI))、TTIあたりのシンボル数、無線フレーム構成、送受信機が周波数領域において行う特定のフィルタリング処理、送受信機が時間領域において行う特定のウィンドウイング処理などの少なくとも1つを示してもよい。 Here, numerology may be a communication parameter applied to at least one of the transmission and reception of a signal or channel. Numerology may indicate, for example, at least one of the following: subcarrier spacing (SCS), bandwidth, symbol length, cyclic prefix length, transmission time interval (TTI), number of symbols per TTI, radio frame structure, specific filtering processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the frequency domain, and specific windowing processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the time domain.
スロットは、時間領域において1つ又は複数のシンボル(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing(OFDM)シンボル、Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access(SC-FDMA)シンボルなど)によって構成されてもよい。また、スロットは、ニューメロロジーに基づく時間単位であってもよい。 A slot may consist of one or more symbols in the time domain (such as Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols or Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) symbols). A slot may also be a time unit based on numerology.
スロットは、複数のミニスロットを含んでもよい。各ミニスロットは、時間領域において1つ又は複数のシンボルによって構成されてもよい。また、ミニスロットは、サブスロットと呼ばれてもよい。ミニスロットは、スロットよりも少ない数のシンボルによって構成されてもよい。ミニスロットより大きい時間単位で送信されるPDSCH(又はPUSCH)は、PDSCH(PUSCH)マッピングタイプAと呼ばれてもよい。ミニスロットを用いて送信されるPDSCH(又はPUSCH)は、PDSCH(PUSCH)マッピングタイプBと呼ばれてもよい。 A slot may include multiple minislots. Each minislot may consist of one or more symbols in the time domain. A minislot may also be called a subslot. A minislot may consist of fewer symbols than a slot. A PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted in a time unit larger than a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type A. A PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted using a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type B.
無線フレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット及びシンボルは、いずれも信号を伝送する際の時間単位を表す。無線フレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット及びシンボルは、それぞれに対応する別の呼称が用いられてもよい。なお、本開示におけるフレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット、シンボルなどの時間単位は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Radio frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol all represent time units for transmitting signals. Radio frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol may each be referred to by a different name. Note that the time units used in this disclosure, such as frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol, may be interchangeable.
例えば、1サブフレームはTTIと呼ばれてもよいし、複数の連続したサブフレームがTTIと呼ばれてよいし、1スロット又は1ミニスロットがTTIと呼ばれてもよい。つまり、サブフレーム及びTTIの少なくとも一方は、既存のLTEにおけるサブフレーム(1ms)であってもよいし、1msより短い期間(例えば、1-13シンボル)であってもよいし、1msより長い期間であってもよい。なお、TTIを表す単位は、サブフレームではなくスロット、ミニスロットなどと呼ばれてもよい。 For example, one subframe may be referred to as a TTI, or multiple consecutive subframes may be referred to as a TTI, or one slot or one minislot may be referred to as a TTI. In other words, at least one of a subframe and a TTI may be a subframe (1 ms) as in existing LTE, or may be a period shorter than 1 ms (e.g., 1-13 symbols), or may be a period longer than 1 ms. Note that the unit representing a TTI may be called a slot, minislot, etc. instead of a subframe.
ここで、TTIは、例えば、無線通信におけるスケジューリングの最小時間単位のことをいう。例えば、LTEシステムでは、基地局が各ユーザ端末に対して、無線リソース(各ユーザ端末において使用することが可能な周波数帯域幅、送信電力など)を、TTI単位で割り当てるスケジューリングを行う。なお、TTIの定義はこれに限られない。 Here, TTI refers to, for example, the smallest time unit for scheduling in wireless communication. For example, in an LTE system, a base station performs scheduling to allocate radio resources (such as the frequency bandwidth and transmission power that can be used by each user terminal) to each user terminal in TTI units. However, the definition of TTI is not limited to this.
TTIは、チャネル符号化されたデータパケット(トランスポートブロック)、コードブロック、コードワードなどの送信時間単位であってもよいし、スケジューリング、リンクアダプテーションなどの処理単位となってもよい。なお、TTIが与えられたとき、実際にトランスポートブロック、コードブロック、コードワードなどがマッピングされる時間区間(例えば、シンボル数)は、当該TTIよりも短くてもよい。 The TTI may be a transmission time unit for a channel-encoded data packet (transport block), code block, code word, etc., or may be a processing unit for scheduling, link adaptation, etc. When a TTI is given, the time interval (e.g., number of symbols) to which a transport block, code block, code word, etc. is actually mapped may be shorter than the TTI.
なお、1スロット又は1ミニスロットがTTIと呼ばれる場合、1以上のTTI(すなわち、1以上のスロット又は1以上のミニスロット)が、スケジューリングの最小時間単位となってもよい。また、当該スケジューリングの最小時間単位を構成するスロット数(ミニスロット数)は制御されてもよい。 Note that when one slot or one minislot is called a TTI, one or more TTIs (i.e., one or more slots or one or more minislots) may be the smallest time unit for scheduling. Furthermore, the number of slots (minislots) that make up the smallest time unit for scheduling may be controlled.
1msの時間長を有するTTIは、通常TTI(3GPP Rel.8-12におけるTTI)、ノーマルTTI、ロングTTI、通常サブフレーム、ノーマルサブフレーム、ロングサブフレーム、スロットなどと呼ばれてもよい。通常TTIより短いTTIは、短縮TTI、ショートTTI、部分TTI(partial又はfractional TTI)、短縮サブフレーム、ショートサブフレーム、ミニスロット、サブスロット、スロットなどと呼ばれてもよい。 A TTI with a time length of 1 ms may be called a regular TTI (TTI in 3GPP Rel. 8-12), normal TTI, long TTI, regular subframe, normal subframe, long subframe, slot, etc. A TTI shorter than a regular TTI may be called a shortened TTI, short TTI, partial TTI (partial or fractional TTI), shortened subframe, short subframe, minislot, subslot, slot, etc.
なお、ロングTTI(例えば、通常TTI、サブフレームなど)は、1msを超える時間長を有するTTIで読み替えてもよいし、ショートTTI(例えば、短縮TTIなど)は、ロングTTIのTTI長未満かつ1ms以上のTTI長を有するTTIで読み替えてもよい。 Note that a long TTI (e.g., a normal TTI, subframe, etc.) may be interpreted as a TTI having a time length of more than 1 ms, and a short TTI (e.g., a shortened TTI, etc.) may be interpreted as a TTI having a TTI length of 1 ms or more but less than the TTI length of a long TTI.
リソースブロック(Resource Block(RB))は、時間領域及び周波数領域のリソース割当単位であり、周波数領域において、1つ又は複数個の連続した副搬送波(サブキャリア(subcarrier))を含んでもよい。RBに含まれるサブキャリアの数は、ニューメロロジーに関わらず同じであってもよく、例えば12であってもよい。RBに含まれるサブキャリアの数は、ニューメロロジーに基づいて決定されてもよい。 A resource block (RB) is a resource allocation unit in the time domain and frequency domain, and may include one or more consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain. The number of subcarriers included in an RB may be the same regardless of numerology, and may be, for example, 12. The number of subcarriers included in an RB may also be determined based on numerology.
また、RBは、時間領域において、1つ又は複数個のシンボルを含んでもよく、1スロット、1ミニスロット、1サブフレーム又は1TTIの長さであってもよい。1TTI、1サブフレームなどは、それぞれ1つ又は複数のリソースブロックによって構成されてもよい。 Furthermore, an RB may include one or more symbols in the time domain and may be one slot, one minislot, one subframe, or one TTI in length. One TTI, one subframe, etc. may each be composed of one or more resource blocks.
なお、1つ又は複数のRBは、物理リソースブロック(Physical RB(PRB))、サブキャリアグループ(Sub-Carrier Group(SCG))、リソースエレメントグループ(Resource Element Group(REG))、PRBペア、RBペアなどと呼ばれてもよい。 Note that one or more RBs may also be referred to as a physical resource block (PRB), a sub-carrier group (SCG), a resource element group (REG), a PRB pair, an RB pair, etc.
また、リソースブロックは、1つ又は複数のリソースエレメント(Resource Element(RE))によって構成されてもよい。例えば、1REは、1サブキャリア及び1シンボルの無線リソース領域であってもよい。 Furthermore, a resource block may be composed of one or more resource elements (REs). For example, one RE may be a radio resource region of one subcarrier and one symbol.
帯域幅部分(Bandwidth Part(BWP))(部分帯域幅などと呼ばれてもよい)は、あるキャリアにおいて、あるニューメロロジー用の連続する共通RB(common resource blocks)のサブセットのことを表してもよい。ここで、共通RBは、当該キャリアの共通参照ポイントを基準としたRBのインデックスによって特定されてもよい。PRBは、あるBWPで定義され、当該BWP内で番号付けされてもよい。 A Bandwidth Part (BWP) (which may also be referred to as a partial bandwidth) may represent a subset of contiguous common resource blocks (RBs) for a given numerology on a given carrier. Here, the common RBs may be identified by the index of the RB relative to the common reference point of the carrier. PRBs may be defined in a BWP and numbered within that BWP.
BWPには、UL BWP(UL用のBWP)と、DL BWP(DL用のBWP)とが含まれてもよい。UEに対して、1キャリア内に1つ又は複数のBWPが設定されてもよい。 BWPs may include UL BWPs (BWPs for UL) and DL BWPs (BWPs for DL). One or more BWPs may be configured for a UE within one carrier.
設定されたBWPの少なくとも1つがアクティブであってもよく、UEは、アクティブなBWPの外で所定の信号/チャネルを送受信することを想定しなくてもよい。なお、本開示における「セル」、「キャリア」などは、「BWP」で読み替えられてもよい。 At least one of the configured BWPs may be active, and the UE may not expect to transmit or receive a given signal/channel outside the active BWP. Note that "cell," "carrier," etc. in this disclosure may be read as "BWP."
なお、上述した無線フレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット及びシンボルなどの構造は例示に過ぎない。例えば、無線フレームに含まれるサブフレームの数、サブフレーム又は無線フレームあたりのスロットの数、スロット内に含まれるミニスロットの数、スロット又はミニスロットに含まれるシンボル及びRBの数、RBに含まれるサブキャリアの数、並びにTTI内のシンボル数、シンボル長、サイクリックプレフィックス(Cyclic Prefix(CP))長などの構成は、様々に変更することができる。 Note that the structures of the radio frames, subframes, slots, minislots, and symbols described above are merely examples. For example, the number of subframes included in a radio frame, the number of slots per subframe or radio frame, the number of minislots included in a slot, the number of symbols and RBs included in a slot or minislot, the number of subcarriers included in an RB, as well as the number of symbols in a TTI, symbol length, and cyclic prefix (CP) length can be changed in various ways.
また、本開示において説明した情報、パラメータなどは、絶対値を用いて表されてもよいし、所定の値からの相対値を用いて表されてもよいし、対応する別の情報を用いて表されてもよい。例えば、無線リソースは、所定のインデックスによって指示されてもよい。 Furthermore, the information, parameters, etc. described in this disclosure may be expressed using absolute values, relative values from a predetermined value, or other corresponding information. For example, radio resources may be indicated by a predetermined index.
本開示においてパラメータなどに使用する名称は、いかなる点においても限定的な名称ではない。さらに、これらのパラメータを使用する数式などは、本開示において明示的に開示したものと異なってもよい。様々なチャネル(PUCCH、PDCCHなど)及び情報要素は、あらゆる好適な名称によって識別できるので、これらの様々なチャネル及び情報要素に割り当てている様々な名称は、いかなる点においても限定的な名称ではない。 The names used for parameters and the like in this disclosure are not limiting in any way. Furthermore, the mathematical formulas and the like using these parameters may differ from those explicitly disclosed in this disclosure. The various channels (PUCCH, PDCCH, etc.) and information elements may be identified by any suitable names, and therefore the various names assigned to these various channels and information elements are not limiting in any way.
本開示において説明した情報、信号などは、様々な異なる技術のいずれかを使用して表されてもよい。例えば、上記の説明全体に渡って言及され得るデータ、命令、コマンド、情報、信号、ビット、シンボル、チップなどは、電圧、電流、電磁波、磁界若しくは磁性粒子、光場若しくは光子、又はこれらの任意の組み合わせによって表されてもよい。 The information, signals, etc. described in this disclosure may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies. For example, data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, chips, etc. that may be referred to throughout the above description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or magnetic particles, optical fields or photons, or any combination thereof.
また、情報、信号などは、上位レイヤから下位レイヤ及び下位レイヤから上位レイヤの少なくとも一方へ出力され得る。情報、信号などは、複数のネットワークノードを介して入出力されてもよい。 Information, signals, etc. may be output from a higher layer to a lower layer and/or from a lower layer to a higher layer. Information, signals, etc. may be input/output via multiple network nodes.
入出力された情報、信号などは、特定の場所(例えば、メモリ)に保存されてもよいし、管理テーブルを用いて管理してもよい。入出力される情報、信号などは、上書き、更新又は追記をされ得る。出力された情報、信号などは、削除されてもよい。入力された情報、信号などは、他の装置へ送信されてもよい。 Input and output information, signals, etc. may be stored in a specific location (for example, memory) or may be managed using a management table. Input and output information, signals, etc. may be overwritten, updated, or added to. Output information, signals, etc. may be deleted. Input information, signals, etc. may be sent to another device.
本開示において記載される任意の情報(例えば、変数、定数、パラメータ)については、上述の実施形態において特に明記されていなくても、任意の第1の装置(例えば、UE/基地局)から任意の第2の装置(例えば、基地局/UE)に対して、当該任意の情報[の値]を示す/特定する(又は当該任意の情報に関連する)情報が、通知されてもよい。 With regard to any information (e.g., variables, constants, parameters) described in this disclosure, even if not specifically stated in the above embodiments, any first device (e.g., UE/base station) may notify any second device (e.g., base station/UE) of information indicating/identifying (or relating to) the value of that information.
情報の通知は、本開示において説明した態様/実施形態に限られず、他の方法を用いて行われてもよい。例えば、本開示における情報の通知は、物理レイヤシグナリング(例えば、下り制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))、上り制御情報(Uplink Control Information(UCI)))、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えば、Radio Resource Control(RRC)シグナリング、ブロードキャスト情報(マスタ情報ブロック(Master Information Block(MIB))、システム情報ブロック(System Information Block(SIB))など)、Medium Access Control(MAC)シグナリング)、その他の信号又はこれらの組み合わせによって実施されてもよい。 The notification of information is not limited to the aspects/embodiments described in this disclosure, and may be performed using other methods. For example, the notification of information in this disclosure may be performed using physical layer signaling (e.g., Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI))), higher layer signaling (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, broadcast information (Master Information Block (MIB), System Information Block (SIB)), etc.), Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling), other signals, or a combination of these.
なお、物理レイヤシグナリングは、Layer 1/Layer 2(L1/L2)制御情報(L1/L2制御信号)、L1制御情報(L1制御信号)などと呼ばれてもよい。また、RRCシグナリングは、RRCメッセージと呼ばれてもよく、例えば、RRC接続セットアップ(RRC Connection Setup)メッセージ、RRC接続再構成(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)メッセージなどであってもよい。また、MACシグナリングは、例えば、MAC制御要素(MAC Control Element(CE))を用いて通知されてもよい。 Note that physical layer signaling may also be referred to as Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) control information (L1/L2 control signal), L1 control information (L1 control signal), etc. Furthermore, RRC signaling may also be referred to as RRC messages, such as RRC Connection Setup messages or RRC Connection Reconfiguration messages. Furthermore, MAC signaling may also be notified using, for example, MAC Control Elements (CEs).
また、所定の情報の通知(例えば、「Xであること」の通知)は、明示的な通知に限られず、暗示的に(例えば、当該所定の情報の通知を行わないことによって又は別の情報の通知によって)行われてもよい。 Furthermore, notification of specified information (e.g., notification that "X is true") is not limited to explicit notification, but may also be done implicitly (e.g., by not notifying the specified information or by notifying other information).
判定は、1ビットで表される値(0か1か)によって行われてもよいし、真(true)又は偽(false)で表される真偽値(boolean)によって行われてもよいし、数値の比較(例えば、所定の値との比較)によって行われてもよい。 The determination may be made based on a value represented by a single bit (0 or 1), a Boolean value represented as true or false, or a comparison of numerical values (for example, a comparison with a predetermined value).
ソフトウェアは、ソフトウェア、ファームウェア、ミドルウェア、マイクロコード、ハードウェア記述言語と呼ばれるか、他の名称で呼ばれるかを問わず、命令、命令セット、コード、コードセグメント、プログラムコード、プログラム、サブプログラム、ソフトウェアモジュール、アプリケーション、ソフトウェアアプリケーション、ソフトウェアパッケージ、ルーチン、サブルーチン、オブジェクト、実行可能ファイル、実行スレッド、手順、機能などを意味するよう広く解釈されるべきである。 Software shall be construed broadly to mean instructions, instruction sets, code, code segments, program code, programs, subprograms, software modules, applications, software applications, software packages, routines, subroutines, objects, executable files, threads of execution, procedures, functions, etc., whether referred to as software, firmware, middleware, microcode, hardware description language, or otherwise.
また、ソフトウェア、命令、情報などは、伝送媒体を介して送受信されてもよい。例えば、ソフトウェアが、有線技術(同軸ケーブル、光ファイバケーブル、ツイストペア、デジタル加入者回線(Digital Subscriber Line(DSL))など)及び無線技術(赤外線、マイクロ波など)の少なくとも一方を使用してウェブサイト、サーバ、又は他のリモートソースから送信される場合、これらの有線技術及び無線技術の少なくとも一方は、伝送媒体の定義内に含まれる。 In addition, software, instructions, information, etc. may be transmitted and received via a transmission medium. For example, if software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using wired technology (such as coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, or Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)) and/or wireless technology (such as infrared or microwave), then the wired and/or wireless technology is included within the definition of transmission medium.
本開示において使用する「システム」及び「ネットワーク」という用語は、互換的に使用され得る。「ネットワーク」は、ネットワークに含まれる装置(例えば、基地局)のことを意味してもよい。 As used in this disclosure, the terms "system" and "network" may be used interchangeably. "Network" may refer to devices included in the network (e.g., base stations).
本開示において、「プリコーディング」、「プリコーダ」、「ウェイト(プリコーディングウェイト)」、「擬似コロケーション(Quasi-Co-Location(QCL))」、「Transmission Configuration Indication state(TCI状態)」、「空間関係(spatial relation)」、「空間ドメインフィルタ(spatial domain filter)」、「送信電力」、「位相回転」、「アンテナポート」、「レイヤ」、「レイヤ数」、「ランク」、「リソース」、「リソースセット」、「ビーム」、「ビーム幅」、「ビーム角度」、「アンテナ」、「アンテナ素子」、「パネル」、「UEパネル」、「送信エンティティ」、「受信エンティティ」、などの用語は、互換的に使用され得る。 In this disclosure, terms such as "precoding," "precoder," "weight (precoding weight)," "Quasi-Co-Location (QCL)," "Transmission Configuration Indication state (TCI state)," "spatial relation," "spatial domain filter," "transmit power," "phase rotation," "antenna port," "layer," "number of layers," "rank," "resource," "resource set," "beam," "beam width," "beam angle," "antenna," "antenna element," "panel," "UE panel," "transmitting entity," "receiving entity," etc. may be used interchangeably.
なお、本開示において、アンテナポートは、任意の信号/チャネルのためのアンテナポート(例えば、復調用参照信号(DeModulation Reference Signal(DMRS))ポート)と互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、リソースは、任意の信号/チャネルのためのリソース(例えば、参照信号リソース、SRSリソースなど)と互いに読み替えられてもよい。なお、リソースは、時間/周波数/符号/空間/電力リソースを含んでもよい。また、空間ドメイン送信フィルタは、空間ドメイン送信フィルタ(spatial domain transmission filter)及び空間ドメイン受信フィルタ(spatial domain reception filter)の少なくとも一方を含んでもよい。 In the present disclosure, the term "antenna port" may be interchangeably read as an antenna port for any signal/channel (e.g., a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) port). In the present disclosure, the term "resource" may be interchangeably read as a resource for any signal/channel (e.g., a reference signal resource, an SRS resource, etc.). The resource may include time/frequency/code/space/power resources. The spatial domain transmit filter may include at least one of a spatial domain transmission filter and a spatial domain reception filter.
上記グループは、例えば、空間関係グループ、符号分割多重(Code Division Multiplexing(CDM))グループ、参照信号(Reference Signal(RS))グループ、制御リソースセット(COntrol REsource SET(CORESET))グループ、PUCCHグループ、アンテナポートグループ(例えば、DMRSポートグループ)、レイヤグループ、リソースグループ、ビームグループ、アンテナグループ、パネルグループなどの少なくとも1つを含んでもよい。 The above groups may include, for example, at least one of a spatial relationship group, a Code Division Multiplexing (CDM) group, a Reference Signal (RS) group, a Control Resource Set (CORESET) group, a PUCCH group, an antenna port group (e.g., a DMRS port group), a layer group, a resource group, a beam group, an antenna group, a panel group, etc.
また、本開示において、ビーム、SRSリソースインディケーター(SRS Resource Indicator(SRI))、CORESET、CORESETプール、PDSCH、PUSCH、コードワード(Codeword(CW))、トランスポートブロック(Transport Block(TB))、RSなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, in this disclosure, beam, SRS Resource Indicator (SRI), CORESET, CORESET pool, PDSCH, PUSCH, codeword (CW), transport block (TB), RS, etc. may be read as interchangeable terms.
また、本開示において、TCI状態、下りリンクTCI状態(DL TCI状態)、上りリンクTCI状態(UL TCI状態)、統一されたTCI状態(unified TCI state)、共通TCI状態(common TCI state)、ジョイントTCI状態などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, in this disclosure, terms such as TCI state, downlink TCI state (DL TCI state), uplink TCI state (UL TCI state), unified TCI state, common TCI state, and joint TCI state may be interpreted interchangeably.
また、本開示において、「QCL」、「QCL想定」、「QCL関係」、「QCLタイプ情報」、「QCL特性(QCL property/properties)」、「特定のQCLタイプ(例えば、タイプA、タイプD)特性」、「特定のQCLタイプ(例えば、タイプA、タイプD)」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, in this disclosure, terms such as "QCL," "QCL assumptions," "QCL relationships," "QCL type information," "QCL properties," "specific QCL type (e.g., Type A, Type D) properties," and "specific QCL types (e.g., Type A, Type D)" may be read interchangeably.
本開示において、インデックス、識別子(Identifier(ID))、インディケーター(indicator)、インディケーション(indication)、リソースIDなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、シーケンス、リスト、セット、グループ、群、クラスター、サブセットなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, terms such as index, identifier (ID), indicator, indication, and resource ID may be interchangeable. In this disclosure, terms such as sequence, list, set, group, cluster, and subset may be interchangeable.
また、空間関係情報Identifier(ID)(TCI状態ID)と空間関係情報(TCI状態)は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。「空間関係情報(TCI状態)」は、「空間関係情報(TCI状態)のセット」、「1つ又は複数の空間関係情報」などと互いに読み替えられてもよい。TCI状態及びTCIは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。空間関係情報及び空間関係は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, the spatial relationship information identifier (ID) (TCI state ID) and spatial relationship information (TCI state) may be interchangeable. "Spatial relationship information (TCI state)" may be interchangeable as "set of spatial relationship information (TCI state)", "one or more pieces of spatial relationship information", etc. TCI state and TCI may be interchangeable. Spatial relationship information and spatial relationship may be interchangeable.
本開示においては、「基地局(Base Station(BS))」、「無線基地局」、「固定局(fixed station)」、「NodeB」、「eNB(eNodeB)」、「gNB(gNodeB)」、「アクセスポイント(access point)」、「送信ポイント(Transmission Point(TP))」、「受信ポイント(Reception Point(RP))」、「送受信ポイント(Transmission/Reception Point(TRP))」、「パネル」、「セル」、「セクタ」、「セルグループ」、「キャリア」、「コンポーネントキャリア」などの用語は、互換的に使用され得る。基地局は、マクロセル、スモールセル、フェムトセル、ピコセルなどの用語で呼ばれる場合もある。 In this disclosure, terms such as "Base Station (BS)," "Radio Base Station," "Fixed Station," "NodeB," "eNB (eNodeB)," "gNB (gNodeB)," "Access Point," "Transmission Point (TP)," "Reception Point (RP)," "Transmission/Reception Point (TRP)," "Panel," "Cell," "Sector," "Cell Group," "Carrier," and "Component Carrier" may be used interchangeably. Base stations may also be referred to by terms such as macrocell, small cell, femtocell, and picocell.
基地局は、1つ又は複数(例えば、3つ)のセルを収容することができる。基地局が複数のセルを収容する場合、基地局のカバレッジエリア全体は複数のより小さいエリアに区分でき、各々のより小さいエリアは、基地局サブシステム(例えば、屋内用の小型基地局(Remote Radio Head(RRH)))によって通信サービスを提供することもできる。「セル」又は「セクタ」という用語は、このカバレッジにおいて通信サービスを行う基地局及び基地局サブシステムの少なくとも一方のカバレッジエリアの一部又は全体を指す。 A base station can accommodate one or more (e.g., three) cells. When a base station accommodates multiple cells, the entire coverage area of the base station can be divided into multiple smaller areas, and each smaller area can also be provided with communication services by a base station subsystem (e.g., a small indoor base station (Remote Radio Head (RRH))). The terms "cell" or "sector" refer to part or all of the coverage area of at least one of the base station and base station subsystems that provide communication services within this coverage area.
本開示において、基地局が端末に情報を送信することは、当該基地局が当該端末に対して、当該情報に基づく制御/動作を指示することと、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, a base station transmitting information to a terminal may be interpreted as the base station instructing the terminal to control/operate based on that information.
本開示においては、「移動局(Mobile Station(MS))」、「ユーザ端末(user terminal)」、「ユーザ装置(User Equipment(UE))」、「端末」などの用語は、互換的に使用され得る。 In this disclosure, terms such as "Mobile Station (MS)," "user terminal," "User Equipment (UE)," and "terminal" may be used interchangeably.
移動局は、加入者局、モバイルユニット、加入者ユニット、ワイヤレスユニット、リモートユニット、モバイルデバイス、ワイヤレスデバイス、ワイヤレス通信デバイス、リモートデバイス、モバイル加入者局、アクセス端末、モバイル端末、ワイヤレス端末、リモート端末、ハンドセット、ユーザエージェント、モバイルクライアント、クライアント又はいくつかの他の適切な用語で呼ばれる場合もある。 A mobile station may also be referred to as a subscriber station, mobile unit, subscriber unit, wireless unit, remote unit, mobile device, wireless device, wireless communication device, remote device, mobile subscriber station, access terminal, mobile terminal, wireless terminal, remote terminal, handset, user agent, mobile client, client, or some other suitable terminology.
基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、送信装置、受信装置、無線通信装置などと呼ばれてもよい。なお、基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、移動体(moving object)に搭載されたデバイス、移動体自体などであってもよい。 At least one of the base station and the mobile station may be referred to as a transmitting device, a receiving device, a wireless communication device, etc. In addition, at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be a device mounted on a moving object, the moving object itself, etc.
当該移動体は、移動可能な物体をいい、移動速度は任意であり、移動体が停止している場合も当然含む。当該移動体は、例えば、車両、輸送車両、自動車、自動二輪車、自転車、コネクテッドカー、ショベルカー、ブルドーザー、ホイールローダー、ダンプトラック、フォークリフト、列車、バス、リヤカー、人力車、船舶(ship and other watercraft)、飛行機、ロケット、人工衛星、ドローン、マルチコプター、クアッドコプター、気球及びこれらに搭載される物を含み、またこれらに限られない。また、当該移動体は、運行指令に基づいて自律走行する移動体であってもよい。 The mobile body in question refers to an object that can move at any speed, and of course also includes cases where the mobile body is stationary. Examples of the mobile body in question include, but are not limited to, vehicles, transport vehicles, automobiles, motorcycles, bicycles, connected cars, excavators, bulldozers, wheel loaders, dump trucks, forklifts, trains, buses, handcarts, rickshaws, ships and other watercraft, airplanes, rockets, satellites, drones, multicopters, quadcopters, balloons, and objects mounted on these. The mobile body in question may also be a mobile body that moves autonomously based on operation commands.
当該移動体は、乗り物(例えば、車、飛行機など)であってもよいし、無人で動く移動体(例えば、ドローン、自動運転車など)であってもよいし、ロボット(有人型又は無人型)であってもよい。なお、基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、必ずしも通信動作時に移動しない装置も含む。例えば、基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、センサなどのInternet of Things(IoT)機器であってもよい。 The moving object may be a vehicle (e.g., a car, an airplane, etc.), an unmanned moving object (e.g., a drone, a self-driving car, etc.), or a robot (manned or unmanned). Note that at least one of the base station and the mobile station may also include devices that do not necessarily move during communication operations. For example, at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be an Internet of Things (IoT) device such as a sensor.
図14は、一実施形態に係る車両の一例を示す図である。車両40は、駆動部41、操舵部42、アクセルペダル43、ブレーキペダル44、シフトレバー45、左右の前輪46、左右の後輪47、車軸48、電子制御部49、各種センサ(電流センサ50、回転数センサ51、空気圧センサ52、車速センサ53、加速度センサ54、アクセルペダルセンサ55、ブレーキペダルセンサ56、シフトレバーセンサ57、及び物体検知センサ58を含む)、情報サービス部59と通信モジュール60を備える。 FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a vehicle according to one embodiment. The vehicle 40 includes a drive unit 41, a steering unit 42, an accelerator pedal 43, a brake pedal 44, a shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, an axle 48, an electronic control unit 49, various sensors (including a current sensor 50, an RPM sensor 51, an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration sensor 54, an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a brake pedal sensor 56, a shift lever sensor 57, and an object detection sensor 58), an information service unit 59, and a communication module 60.
駆動部41は、例えば、エンジン、モータ、エンジンとモータのハイブリッドの少なくとも1つで構成される。操舵部42は、少なくともステアリングホイール(ハンドルとも呼ぶ)を含み、ユーザによって操作されるステアリングホイールの操作に基づいて前輪46及び後輪47の少なくとも一方を操舵するように構成される。 The drive unit 41 is composed of, for example, at least one of an engine, a motor, or a hybrid of an engine and a motor. The steering unit 42 includes at least a steering wheel (also called a handle) and is configured to steer at least one of the front wheels 46 and the rear wheels 47 based on the operation of the steering wheel operated by the user.
電子制御部49は、マイクロプロセッサ61、メモリ(ROM、RAM)62、通信ポート(例えば、入出力(Input/Output(IO))ポート)63で構成される。電子制御部49には、車両に備えられた各種センサ50-58からの信号が入力される。電子制御部49は、Electronic Control Unit(ECU)と呼ばれてもよい。 The electronic control unit 49 is composed of a microprocessor 61, memory (ROM, RAM) 62, and a communication port (e.g., an input/output (IO) port) 63. Signals are input to the electronic control unit 49 from various sensors 50-58 provided in the vehicle. The electronic control unit 49 may also be called an Electronic Control Unit (ECU).
各種センサ50-58からの信号としては、モータの電流をセンシングする電流センサ50からの電流信号、回転数センサ51によって取得された前輪46/後輪47の回転数信号、空気圧センサ52によって取得された前輪46/後輪47の空気圧信号、車速センサ53によって取得された車速信号、加速度センサ54によって取得された加速度信号、アクセルペダルセンサ55によって取得されたアクセルペダル43の踏み込み量信号、ブレーキペダルセンサ56によって取得されたブレーキペダル44の踏み込み量信号、シフトレバーセンサ57によって取得されたシフトレバー45の操作信号、物体検知センサ58によって取得された障害物、車両、歩行者などを検出するための検出信号などがある。 Signals from the various sensors 50-58 include a current signal from a current sensor 50 that senses the motor current, a rotation speed signal for the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 obtained by a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure signal for the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 obtained by an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed signal obtained by a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration signal obtained by an acceleration sensor 54, a depression amount signal for the accelerator pedal 43 obtained by an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a depression amount signal for the brake pedal 44 obtained by a brake pedal sensor 56, an operation signal for the shift lever 45 obtained by a shift lever sensor 57, and a detection signal for detecting obstacles, vehicles, pedestrians, etc. obtained by an object detection sensor 58.
情報サービス部59は、カーナビゲーションシステム、オーディオシステム、スピーカー、ディスプレイ、テレビ、ラジオ、といった、運転情報、交通情報、エンターテイメント情報などの各種情報を提供(出力)するための各種機器と、これらの機器を制御する1つ以上のECUとから構成される。情報サービス部59は、外部装置から通信モジュール60などを介して取得した情報を利用して、車両40の乗員に各種情報/サービス(例えば、マルチメディア情報/マルチメディアサービス)を提供する。 The information service unit 59 is composed of various devices, such as a car navigation system, audio system, speakers, displays, televisions, and radios, that provide (output) various information such as driving information, traffic information, and entertainment information, as well as one or more ECUs that control these devices. The information service unit 59 uses information obtained from external devices via the communication module 60, etc., to provide various information/services (e.g., multimedia information/multimedia services) to the occupants of the vehicle 40.
情報サービス部59は、外部からの入力を受け付ける入力デバイス(例えば、キーボード、マウス、マイクロフォン、スイッチ、ボタン、センサ、タッチパネルなど)を含んでもよいし、外部への出力を実施する出力デバイス(例えば、ディスプレイ、スピーカー、LEDランプ、タッチパネルなど)を含んでもよい。 The information service unit 59 may include input devices (e.g., keyboards, mice, microphones, switches, buttons, sensors, touch panels, etc.) that accept input from the outside, and may also include output devices (e.g., displays, speakers, LED lamps, touch panels, etc.) that output to the outside.
運転支援システム部64は、ミリ波レーダ、Light Detection and Ranging(LiDAR)、カメラ、測位ロケータ(例えば、Global Navigation Satellite System(GNSS)など)、地図情報(例えば、高精細(High Definition(HD))マップ、自動運転車(Autonomous Vehicle(AV))マップなど)、ジャイロシステム(例えば、慣性計測装置(Inertial Measurement Unit(IMU))、慣性航法装置(Inertial Navigation System(INS))など)、人工知能(Artificial Intelligence(AI))チップ、AIプロセッサといった、事故を未然に防止したりドライバの運転負荷を軽減したりするための機能を提供するための各種機器と、これらの機器を制御する1つ以上のECUとから構成される。また、運転支援システム部64は、通信モジュール60を介して各種情報を送受信し、運転支援機能又は自動運転機能を実現する。 The driving assistance system unit 64 is composed of various devices that provide functions to prevent accidents and reduce the driver's driving burden, such as millimeter-wave radar, Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR), cameras, positioning locators (e.g., Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)), map information (e.g., High Definition (HD) maps, Autonomous Vehicle (AV) maps), gyro systems (e.g., Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU) and Inertial Navigation System (INS)), artificial intelligence (AI) chips, and AI processors, as well as one or more ECUs that control these devices. The driving assistance system unit 64 also transmits and receives various information via the communication module 60 to realize driving assistance or autonomous driving functions.
通信モジュール60は、通信ポート63を介して、マイクロプロセッサ61及び車両40の構成要素と通信することができる。例えば、通信モジュール60は通信ポート63を介して、車両40に備えられた駆動部41、操舵部42、アクセルペダル43、ブレーキペダル44、シフトレバー45、左右の前輪46、左右の後輪47、車軸48、電子制御部49内のマイクロプロセッサ61及びメモリ(ROM、RAM)62、各種センサ50-58との間でデータ(情報)を送受信する。 The communication module 60 can communicate with the microprocessor 61 and components of the vehicle 40 via the communication port 63. For example, the communication module 60 transmits and receives data (information) via the communication port 63 between the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, the microprocessor 61 and memory (ROM, RAM) 62 in the electronic control unit 49, and the various sensors 50-58, all of which are provided on the vehicle 40.
通信モジュール60は、電子制御部49のマイクロプロセッサ61によって制御可能であり、外部装置と通信を行うことが可能な通信デバイスである。例えば、外部装置との間で無線通信を介して各種情報の送受信を行う。通信モジュール60は、電子制御部49の内部と外部のどちらにあってもよい。外部装置は、例えば、上述の基地局10、ユーザ端末20などであってもよい。また、通信モジュール60は、例えば、上述の基地局10及びユーザ端末20の少なくとも1つであってもよい(基地局10及びユーザ端末20の少なくとも1つとして機能してもよい)。 The communication module 60 is a communication device that can be controlled by the microprocessor 61 of the electronic control unit 49 and can communicate with external devices. For example, it sends and receives various information to and from external devices via wireless communication. The communication module 60 may be located either inside or outside the electronic control unit 49. The external device may be, for example, the base station 10 or user terminal 20 described above. The communication module 60 may also be, for example, at least one of the base station 10 and user terminal 20 described above (or may function as at least one of the base station 10 and user terminal 20).
通信モジュール60は、電子制御部49に入力された上述の各種センサ50-58からの信号、当該信号に基づいて得られる情報、及び情報サービス部59を介して得られる外部(ユーザ)からの入力に基づく情報、の少なくとも1つを、無線通信を介して外部装置へ送信してもよい。電子制御部49、各種センサ50-58、情報サービス部59などは、入力を受け付ける入力部と呼ばれてもよい。例えば、通信モジュール60によって送信されるPUSCHは、上記入力に基づく情報を含んでもよい。 The communications module 60 may transmit at least one of the following to an external device via wireless communication: signals from the various sensors 50-58 described above input to the electronic control unit 49; information obtained based on these signals; and information based on input from the outside (user) obtained via the information service unit 59. The electronic control unit 49, the various sensors 50-58, the information service unit 59, etc. may also be referred to as input units that accept input. For example, the PUSCH transmitted by the communications module 60 may include information based on the above input.
通信モジュール60は、外部装置から送信されてきた種々の情報(交通情報、信号情報、車間情報など)を受信し、車両に備えられた情報サービス部59へ表示する。情報サービス部59は、情報を出力する(例えば、通信モジュール60によって受信されるPDSCH(又は当該PDSCHから復号されるデータ/情報)に基づいてディスプレイ、スピーカーなどの機器に情報を出力する)出力部と呼ばれてもよい。 The communications module 60 receives various information (traffic information, traffic signal information, vehicle-to-vehicle information, etc.) transmitted from external devices and displays it on the information service unit 59 installed in the vehicle. The information service unit 59 may also be called an output unit that outputs information (for example, outputs information to a device such as a display or speaker based on the PDSCH received by the communications module 60 (or data/information decoded from the PDSCH)).
また、通信モジュール60は、外部装置から受信した種々の情報をマイクロプロセッサ61によって利用可能なメモリ62へ記憶する。メモリ62に記憶された情報に基づいて、マイクロプロセッサ61が車両40に備えられた駆動部41、操舵部42、アクセルペダル43、ブレーキペダル44、シフトレバー45、左右の前輪46、左右の後輪47、車軸48、各種センサ50-58などの制御を行ってもよい。 Furthermore, the communication module 60 stores various information received from external devices in memory 62 that can be used by the microprocessor 61. Based on the information stored in memory 62, the microprocessor 61 may control the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, various sensors 50-58, and other components provided on the vehicle 40.
また、本開示における基地局は、ユーザ端末で読み替えてもよい。例えば、基地局及びユーザ端末間の通信を、複数のユーザ端末間の通信(例えば、Device-to-Device(D2D)、Vehicle-to-Everything(V2X)などと呼ばれてもよい)に置き換えた構成について、本開示の各態様/実施形態を適用してもよい。この場合、上述の基地局10が有する機能をユーザ端末20が有する構成としてもよい。また、「上りリンク(uplink)」、「下りリンク(downlink)」などの文言は、端末間通信に対応する文言(例えば、「サイドリンク(sidelink)」)で読み替えられてもよい。例えば、上りリンクチャネル、下りリンクチャネルなどは、サイドリンクチャネルで読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, the base station in the present disclosure may be read as a user terminal. For example, the aspects/embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to a configuration in which communication between a base station and a user terminal is replaced with communication between multiple user terminals (which may be called, for example, Device-to-Device (D2D) or Vehicle-to-Everything (V2X)). In this case, the user terminal 20 may be configured to have the functions possessed by the base station 10 described above. Furthermore, terms such as "uplink" and "downlink" may be read as terms corresponding to communication between terminals (for example, "sidelink"). For example, terms such as uplink channel and downlink channel may be read as sidelink channel.
同様に、本開示におけるユーザ端末は、基地局で読み替えてもよい。この場合、上述のユーザ端末20が有する機能を基地局10が有する構成としてもよい。 Similarly, the term "user terminal" in this disclosure may be interpreted as "base station." In this case, the base station 10 may be configured to have the functions possessed by the user terminal 20 described above.
本開示において、基地局によって行われるとした動作は、場合によってはその上位ノード(upper node)によって行われることもある。基地局を有する1つ又は複数のネットワークノード(network nodes)を含むネットワークにおいて、端末との通信のために行われる様々な動作は、基地局、基地局以外の1つ以上のネットワークノード(例えば、Mobility Management Entity(MME)、Serving-Gateway(S-GW)などが考えられるが、これらに限られない)又はこれらの組み合わせによって行われ得ることは明らかである。 In this disclosure, operations described as being performed by a base station may in some cases also be performed by its upper node. In a network including one or more network nodes having base stations, it is clear that various operations performed for communication with terminals may be performed by the base station, one or more network nodes other than the base station (such as, but not limited to, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) or a Serving-Gateway (S-GW)), or a combination thereof.
本開示において説明した各態様/実施形態は単独で用いてもよいし、組み合わせて用いてもよいし、実行に伴って切り替えて用いてもよい。また、本開示において説明した各態様/実施形態の処理手順、シーケンス、フローチャートなどは、矛盾の無い限り、順序を入れ替えてもよい。例えば、本開示において説明した方法については、例示的な順序を用いて様々なステップの要素を提示しており、提示した特定の順序に限定されない。 Each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be used alone, in combination, or switched between depending on the implementation. Furthermore, the processing procedures, sequences, flowcharts, etc. of each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be rearranged as long as they are consistent. For example, the methods described in this disclosure present various step elements in an exemplary order, and are not limited to the specific order presented.
本開示において説明した各態様/実施形態は、Long Term Evolution(LTE)、LTE-Advanced(LTE-A)、LTE-Beyond(LTE-B)、SUPER 3G、IMT-Advanced、4th generation mobile communication system(4G)、5th generation mobile communication system(5G)、6th generation mobile communication system(6G)、xth generation mobile communication system(xG(xは、例えば整数、小数))、Future Radio Access(FRA)、New-Radio Access Technology(RAT)、New Radio(NR)、New radio access(NX)、Future generation radio access(FX)、Global System for Mobile communications(GSM(登録商標))、CDMA2000、Ultra Mobile Broadband(UMB)、IEEE 802.11(Wi-Fi(登録商標))、IEEE 802.16(WiMAX(登録商標))、IEEE 802.20、Ultra-WideBand(UWB)、Bluetooth(登録商標)、その他の適切な無線通信方法を利用するシステム、これらに基づいて拡張、修正、作成又は規定された次世代システムなどに適用されてもよい。また、複数のシステムが組み合わされて(例えば、LTE又はLTE-Aと、5Gとの組み合わせなど)適用されてもよい。 Each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be applied to any of the following mobile communication systems: Long Term Evolution (LTE), LTE-Advanced (LTE-A), LTE-Beyond (LTE-B), SUPER 3G, IMT-Advanced, 4th generation mobile communication system (4G), 5th generation mobile communication system (5G), 6th generation mobile communication system (6G), xth generation mobile communication system (xG (x is, for example, an integer or decimal number)), Future Radio Access (FRA), New-Radio The present invention may be applied to systems that use Access Technology (RAT), New Radio (NR), New radio access (NX), Future generation radio access (FX), Global System for Mobile communications (GSM (registered trademark)), CDMA2000, Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB), IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi (registered trademark)), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX (registered trademark)), IEEE 802.20, Ultra-WideBand (UWB), Bluetooth (registered trademark), or other appropriate wireless communication methods, as well as next-generation systems that are extended, modified, created, or defined based on these. It may also be applied to a combination of multiple systems (for example, a combination of LTE or LTE-A with 5G).
本開示において使用する「に基づいて」という記載は、別段に明記されていない限り、「のみに基づいて」を意味しない。言い換えれば、「に基づいて」という記載は、「のみに基づいて」と「に少なくとも基づいて」の両方を意味する。 As used in this disclosure, the phrase "based on" does not mean "based only on," unless expressly stated otherwise. In other words, the phrase "based on" means both "based only on" and "based at least on."
本開示において使用する「第1の」、「第2の」などの呼称を使用した要素へのいかなる参照も、それらの要素の量又は順序を全般的に限定しない。これらの呼称は、2つ以上の要素間を区別する便利な方法として本開示において使用され得る。したがって、第1及び第2の要素の参照は、2つの要素のみが採用され得ること又は何らかの形で第1の要素が第2の要素に先行しなければならないことを意味しない。 As used in this disclosure, any reference to an element using a designation such as "first," "second," etc. does not generally limit the quantity or order of those elements. These designations may be used in this disclosure as a convenient method of distinguishing between two or more elements. Thus, a reference to a first and a second element does not imply that only two elements may be employed or that the first element must in some way precede the second element.
本開示において使用する「判断(決定)(determining)」という用語は、多種多様な動作を包含する場合がある。例えば、「判断(決定)」は、判定(judging)、計算(calculating)、算出(computing)、処理(processing)、導出(deriving)、調査(investigating)、探索(looking up、search、inquiry)(例えば、テーブル、データベース又は別のデータ構造での探索)、確認(ascertaining)などを「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。 As used in this disclosure, the term "determining" may encompass a wide variety of actions. For example, "determining" may be considered to be judging, calculating, computing, processing, deriving, investigating, looking up, search, inquiry (e.g., searching in a table, database, or other data structure), ascertaining, etc.
また、「判断(決定)」は、受信(receiving)(例えば、情報を受信すること)、送信(transmitting)(例えば、情報を送信すること)、入力(input)、出力(output)、アクセス(accessing)(例えば、メモリ中のデータにアクセスすること)などを「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。 Furthermore, "determination" may be considered to be "determining" receiving (e.g., receiving information), transmitting (e.g., sending information), input, output, accessing (e.g., accessing data in memory), etc.
また、「判断(決定)」は、解決(resolving)、選択(selecting)、選定(choosing)、確立(establishing)、比較(comparing)などを「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。つまり、「判断(決定)」は、何らかの動作を「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。本開示において、「判断(決定)」は、上述した動作と互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, "judgment (decision)" may be considered to mean "judging (deciding)" resolving, selecting, choosing, establishing, comparing, etc. In other words, "judgment (decision)" may be considered to mean "judging (deciding)" some kind of action. In this disclosure, "judgment (decision)" may be read interchangeably with the above-mentioned actions.
また、本開示において、「判断(決定)(determine/determining)」は、「想定する(assume/assuming)」、「期待する(expect/expecting)」、「みなす(consider/considering)」などと互いに読み替えられてもよい。なお、本開示において、「...することを想定しない」は、「...しないことを想定する」と互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, in this disclosure, "determine/determining" may be interpreted interchangeably as "assume/assuming," "expect/expecting," "consider/considering," etc. Furthermore, in this disclosure, "does not expect to do..." may be interpreted interchangeably as "assumes not to do...."
本開示において、「期待する(expect)」は、「期待される(be expected)」と互いに読み替えられてもよい。例えば、「...を期待する(expect(s) ...)」(”...”は、例えばthat節、to不定詞などで表現されてもよい)は、「...を期待される(be expected ...)」、「...する(上記”...”がto不定詞の場合はtoを取った動詞)」などと互いに読み替えられてもよい。「...を期待しない(does not expect ...)」は、「...を期待されない(be not expected ...)」、「...しない(上記”...”がto不定詞の場合はtoを取った動詞)」などと互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、「装置Aは...を期待されない(An apparatus A is not expected ...)」は、「装置A以外の装置Bが、当該装置Aについて...を期待しない」と互いに読み替えられてもよい(例えば、装置AがUEである場合、装置Bは基地局であってもよい)。 In the present disclosure, "expect" may be interchangeably read as "be expected." For example, "expect(s)..." ("..." may be expressed, for example, as a that clause, a to-infinitive, etc.) may be interchangeably read as "be expected..." or "does... (if the above "..." is a to-infinitive, a verb with "to")." "does not expect..." may be interchangeably read as "be not expected..." or "does not... (if the above "..." is a to-infinitive, a verb with "to")." Furthermore, "An apparatus A is not expected..." may be interchangeably read as "apparatus B other than apparatus A does not expect..." from apparatus A (for example, if apparatus A is a UE, apparatus B may be a base station).
本開示に記載の「最大送信電力」は送信電力の最大値を意味してもよいし、公称最大送信電力(the nominal UE maximum transmit power)を意味してもよいし、定格最大送信電力(the rated UE maximum transmit power)を意味してもよい。 The term "maximum transmit power" used in this disclosure may refer to the maximum value of transmit power, the nominal UE maximum transmit power, or the rated UE maximum transmit power.
本開示において使用する「接続された(connected)」、「結合された(coupled)」という用語、又はこれらのあらゆる変形は、2又はそれ以上の要素間の直接的又は間接的なあらゆる接続又は結合を意味し、互いに「接続」又は「結合」された2つの要素間に1又はそれ以上の中間要素が存在することを含むことができる。要素間の結合又は接続は、物理的であっても、論理的であっても、あるいはこれらの組み合わせであってもよい。例えば、「接続」は「アクセス」で読み替えられてもよい。 As used in this disclosure, the terms "connected," "coupled," or any variation thereof, mean any direct or indirect connection or coupling between two or more elements, and may include the presence of one or more intermediate elements between two elements that are "connected" or "coupled" to each other. The coupling or connection between elements may be physical, logical, or a combination thereof. For example, "connected" may be read as "access."
本開示において、2つの要素が接続される場合、1つ以上の電線、ケーブル、プリント電気接続などを用いて、並びにいくつかの非限定的かつ非包括的な例として、無線周波数領域、マイクロ波領域、光(可視及び不可視の両方)領域の波長を有する電磁エネルギーなどを用いて、互いに「接続」又は「結合」されると考えることができる。 For the purposes of this disclosure, when two elements are connected, they may be considered to be "connected" or "coupled" to one another using one or more wires, cables, printed electrical connections, etc., as well as using electromagnetic energy having wavelengths in the radio frequency range, microwave range, light (both visible and invisible) range, etc., as some non-limiting and non-exhaustive examples.
本開示において、「AとBが異なる」という用語は、「AとBが互いに異なる」ことを意味してもよい。なお、当該用語は、「AとBがそれぞれCと異なる」ことを意味してもよい。「離れる」、「結合される」などの用語も、「異なる」と同様に解釈されてもよい。 In this disclosure, the term "A and B are different" may mean "A and B are different from each other." Note that this term may also mean "A and B are each different from C." Terms such as "separate" and "combined" may also be interpreted in the same way as "different."
本開示において、「含む(include)」、「含んでいる(including)」及びこれらの変形が使用されている場合、これらの用語は、用語「備える(comprising)」と同様に、包括的であることが意図される。さらに、本開示において使用されている用語「又は(or)」は、排他的論理和ではないことが意図される。 When the terms "include," "including," and variations thereof are used in this disclosure, these terms are intended to be inclusive, similar to the term "comprising." Furthermore, when the term "or" is used in this disclosure, it is not intended to be an exclusive or.
本開示において、例えば、英語でのa, an及びtheのように、翻訳によって冠詞が追加された場合、本開示は、これらの冠詞の後に続く名詞が複数形であることを含んでもよい。 In this disclosure, where articles are added by translation, such as a, an, and the in English, this disclosure may include the noun following these articles being plural.
本開示において、「以下」、「未満」、「以上」、「より多い」、「と等しい」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、本開示において、「良い」、「悪い」、「大きい」、「小さい」、「高い」、「低い」、「早い」、「遅い」、「広い」、「狭い」、などを意味する文言は、原級、比較級及び最上級に限らず互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、本開示において、「良い」、「悪い」、「大きい」、「小さい」、「高い」、「低い」、「早い」、「遅い」、「広い」、「狭い」などを意味する文言は、「i番目に」(iは任意の整数)を付けた表現として、原級、比較級及び最上級に限らず互いに読み替えられてもよい(例えば、「最高」は「i番目に最高」と互いに読み替えられてもよい)。 In this disclosure, terms such as "less than or equal to," "less than," "greater than," "more than," "equal to," etc. may be read interchangeably. Furthermore, in this disclosure, terms meaning "good," "bad," "big," "small," "high," "low," "fast," "slow," "wide," "narrow," etc. may be read interchangeably, not limited to the positive, comparative, and superlative. Furthermore, in this disclosure, terms meaning "good," "bad," "big," "small," "high," "low," "fast," "slow," "wide," "narrow," etc. may be read interchangeably, not limited to the positive, comparative, and superlative, as expressions with the prefix "i-th" (i is any integer) (for example, "highest" may be read interchangeably as "i-th highest").
本開示において、「の(of)」、「のための(for)」、「に関する(regarding)」、「に関係する(related to)」、「に関連付けられる(associated with)」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, the terms "of," "for," "regarding," "related to," "associated with," etc. may be read interchangeably.
本開示において、「Aのとき(場合)、B(when A, B)」、「(もし)Aならば、B(if A, (then) B)」、「Aの際にB(B upon A)」、「Aに応じてB(B in response to A)」、「Aに基づいてB(B based on A)」、「Aの間B(B during/while A)」、「Aの前にB(B before A)」、「Aにおいて(Aと同時に)B(B at( the same time as)/on A)」、「Aの後にB(B after A)」、「A以来B(B since A)」、「AまでB(B until A)」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。なお、ここでのA、Bなどは、文脈に応じて、名詞、動名詞、通常の文章など適宜適当な表現に置き換えられてもよい。なお、AとBの時間差は、ほぼ0(直後又は直前)であってもよい。また、Aが生じる時間には、時間オフセットが適用されてもよい。例えば、「A」は「Aが生じる時間オフセット前/後」と互いに読み替えられてもよい。当該時間オフセット(例えば、1つ以上のシンボル/スロット)は、予め規定されてもよいし、通知される情報に基づいてUEによって特定されてもよい。 In the present disclosure, expressions such as "when A, B," "if A, (then) B," "B upon A," "B in response to A," "B based on A," "B during/while A," "B before A," "B at (the same time as)/on A," "B after A," "B since A," and "B until A" may be interchangeable. Note that A and B may be replaced with other appropriate expressions, such as nouns, gerunds, and regular sentences, depending on the context. The time difference between A and B may be nearly zero (immediately after or immediately before). A time offset may also be applied to the time at which A occurs. For example, "A" may be interpreted interchangeably as "before/after the time offset at which A occurs." The time offset (e.g., one or more symbols/slots) may be predefined or may be determined by the UE based on signaled information.
本開示において、タイミング、時刻、時間、時間インスタンス、任意の時間単位(例えば、スロット、サブスロット、シンボル、サブフレーム)、期間(period)、機会(occasion)、リソースなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, terms such as timing, time, duration, time instance, any time unit (e.g., slot, subslot, symbol, subframe), period, occasion, and resource may be interpreted interchangeably.
以上、本開示に係る発明について詳細に説明したが、当業者にとっては、本開示に係る発明が本開示中に説明した実施形態に限定されないということは明らかである。本開示の記載は、例示説明を目的とし、本開示に係る発明に対して何ら制限的な意味をもたらさない。
Although the invention according to the present disclosure has been described in detail above, it is clear to those skilled in the art that the invention according to the present disclosure is not limited to the embodiments described in the present disclosure. The description of the present disclosure is for illustrative purposes only and does not impose any limiting meaning on the invention according to the present disclosure.
Claims (6)
前記複数の指示TCI状態に基づいて下りリンク受信及び上りリンク送信の少なくとも一つを制御する制御部と、を有し、
前記制御部は、複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを示す情報を受信した場合、前記サブセットを示す情報に基づいて、前記複数の指示TCI状態の一部の指示TCI状態を更新し、残りの指示TCI状態を維持する端末。 a receiver for receiving at least one of downlink control information indicating a plurality of Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) states and a MAC Control Element (MAC CE);
a control unit that controls at least one of downlink reception and uplink transmission based on the plurality of indicated TCI states;
A terminal in which, when the control unit receives information indicating a subset of a plurality of indicated TCI states, the control unit updates some of the indicated TCI states based on the information indicating the subset, and maintains the remaining indicated TCI states.
前記複数の指示TCI状態に基づいて下りリンク受信及び上りリンク送信の少なくとも一つを制御するステップと、を有し、
複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを示す情報を受信した場合、前記サブセットを示す情報に基づいて、前記複数の指示TCI状態の一部の指示TCI状態を更新し、残りの指示TCI状態を維持する端末の無線通信方法。 receiving at least one of downlink control information and a MAC Control Element (MAC CE) indicating a plurality of Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) states;
and controlling at least one of downlink reception and uplink transmission based on the plurality of indicated TCI states;
A wireless communication method for a terminal, which, when receiving information indicating a subset of a plurality of indicated TCI states, updates some of the indicated TCI states based on the information indicating the subset, and maintains the remaining indicated TCI states.
前記複数の指示TCI状態に基づいて下りリンク受信及び上りリンク送信の少なくとも一つを制御する制御部と、を有し、
前記制御部は、複数の指示TCI状態のサブセットを示す情報を送信した場合、前記複数の指示TCI状態の一部の指示TCI状態を更新し、残りの指示TCI状態を維持する基地局。
a transmitter for transmitting at least one of downlink control information and a MAC Control Element (MAC CE) indicating a plurality of Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) states;
a control unit that controls at least one of downlink reception and uplink transmission based on the plurality of indicated TCI states;
A base station, wherein when the control unit transmits information indicating a subset of a plurality of indicated TCI states, the control unit updates some of the indicated TCI states and maintains the remaining indicated TCI states.
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/JP2024/003692 WO2025169266A1 (en) | 2024-02-05 | 2024-02-05 | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/JP2024/003692 WO2025169266A1 (en) | 2024-02-05 | 2024-02-05 | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025169266A1 true WO2025169266A1 (en) | 2025-08-14 |
Family
ID=96699440
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/JP2024/003692 Pending WO2025169266A1 (en) | 2024-02-05 | 2024-02-05 | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2025169266A1 (en) |
Citations (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2022219570A1 (en) * | 2021-04-13 | 2022-10-20 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Common spatial filter updates for multi-downlink control information (dci) based multi-transmission reception point (trp) systems |
-
2024
- 2024-02-05 WO PCT/JP2024/003692 patent/WO2025169266A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2022219570A1 (en) * | 2021-04-13 | 2022-10-20 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Common spatial filter updates for multi-downlink control information (dci) based multi-transmission reception point (trp) systems |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| WO2025169266A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2025182798A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2025177348A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2025173102A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2025258043A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| JP2025156204A (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method and base station | |
| WO2025210912A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2024185636A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2024069968A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2024181346A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| JP2025155667A (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method and base station | |
| WO2024171373A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2025041763A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2024171374A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2025041764A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2024236709A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2025032760A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2024100733A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2024261990A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2024095478A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2024219414A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2024095477A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2024261989A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2025220062A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station | |
| WO2025220643A1 (en) | Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 24923950 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |